This TMLList describes the commands in the British English installation of Trimble Terramodel 10.61H (which includes the Geocomp Update), is complied by Geocomp Systems and was last updated on 4 April 2013.
The commands are similar in the US English, Spanish, French and German language installations, but some menus, dialogs and documentation are different.
Commands can be entered at the Terramodel command line and selected by menus, toolbars, workspaces, macros or function keys. To use commands, you will need the required modules.
This list includes all standard Terramodel commands and hundreds of other commands (TMLs) from Geocomp Systems and some other sources. Continuous development means that this list can never be entirely complete, accurate nor current.
To search this list by keyword, use Ctrl F.
Click here to see the latest version of this list. To update this list in Terramodel, right click on this link then Save Link As or Save Target As tmllist.htm to C:\Program Files (x86)\Trimble\Terramodel\Geocomp\Docs\ or C:\Program Files\Trimble\Terramodel\Geocomp\Docs\.
The multicoloured brief description table below lists each command in alphabetical order with a short description and category.
Below this table is the blue details table which also lists each command but with more detail which may include links, last revision date, manuals, menu location, source and Geocomp equivalent. Every command is linked between the two main tables.
These colours indicate how each command is supplied. More info... |
| Standard Trimble command |
| Geocomp Update adds new command |
| Geocomp Update modifies Trimble command |
| Install separately |
| New or recently modified; contact Geocomp Systems for the latest release |
| NAME | BRIEF DESCRIPTION | CATEGORY |
| 3D | Compute points offset from a selected alignment | alignment |
| 3DFILTER | Filter superfluous points from DTM | dtm |
| 3DMCOUT | Export to Topcon 3D-MC MCA file | export |
| 3DPIPE | Report 3D lengths and angles for a set | report |
| ABOUT | Report Terramodel version number and modules. | report, config |
| ABBREVSET | Set prefix abbreviations for labelling and display | set |
| ACTIVE | Set active alignment | alignment |
| ACTIVECHAINAGE | Set active chainage (station) | alignment |
| ACTIVESTATION | Same as ACTIVECHAINAGE | alignment |
| ADD2NAME | Add a prefix or suffix to names of points, plines and sets | name |
| ADD2PTNO | Add a prefix or suffix to point numbers | point |
| ADD2TXT | Add a prefix or suffix to text | text |
| ADDIMAGE | Add an image to selected plotboxes | image |
| ADDISO | Add an isopach layer to a DTM layer | dtm |
| ADDTIDES | Add tide heights to depths | nav |
| ADJAREA | Adjust a lot to an nominated area | set |
| ADJUSTAREA | Same as ADJAREA | set |
| AIRVALVE | Label a pipe with airvalve blocks | block |
| ALIAS | Create and edit aliases | config |
| ALIGNIMP | Import an alignment from an ASCII file | alignment |
| ALIGNOFF | Import alignment offsets from an ASCII file | alignment |
| ALIGNTXT | Align text to HAL | align, text |
| ALL | Display all visible objects in the active view | view |
| ALT | Enable menus for entry by keyboard | menu |
| ANG | Report angle-right between points | report |
| ARC | Draw pline arcs from any three parameters | set |
| ARC2P | Create a pline arc using two points and a radius | set |
| ARC2PSET | Create a set arc using two points and a radius | set |
| ARCBL | Create breaklines along all arcs on a layer | dtm, set |
| ARCBREAK | Replace set arcs with points and chords | set |
| ARCENTRE | Toggle visibility of set arc centre points | toggle |
| ARCS | Replaced by ARC | set |
| AREA | Report the area of a closed figure | report |
| AREA2SET | Replaced by TRACEBDY | set |
| ARRANGE | Arrange icons of minimised views | view |
| ASAPIMAG | Add mastersheet images to plotboxes | image |
| ASHIN | Import an Ashtech points file | import |
| AUSGEOID | Import an AUSGeoid DAT file | import |
| AUTODRAFT | Create line, block and text features from field codes | survey |
| AUTOSAVE | Enable automatic saving of project files | config |
| AUTOSET | Create a clockwise set from points | set |
| AVGEND | Compute volumes by end-area | report |
| BBEAR | Create a point at the intersection of two bearings | point |
| BDIST | Create a point at the intersection of a bearing and an arc | point |
| BDYRELAY | Relayer within boundary and bandwidth | layer |
| BEARTEXT | Adds a datum angle to bearing text | text |
| BENCH | Create a bench string | set |
| BFITCURV | Draw a curve of best fit | set |
| BFITLINE | Draw a line of best fit | set |
| BGELEV | Copy points into an elevation view | view |
| BIN2IMG | Create a coloured image from depths | nav |
| BL | Create breaklines | set |
| BLDG | Create plines with corners at right angles | set |
| BLFILTER | Filter excess points from breaklines | dtm, set |
| BLINECHK | Check for crossing breaklines | set |
| BLKPTS | Place blocks at points based upon BLOCK.MAP file | block |
| BLKREAD | Replace an internal block with an external block | block |
| BLOCK | Create, place, list or purge blocks | block |
| BLOCKLST | Create a chart of blocks | block |
| BMAP | Replaced by BLKPTS | block |
| BOX | Create a pline box | pline |
| BREAK | Break a pline or set into two parts | pline, set |
| BUILDING | Construct a building with perpendicular or angled sides | pline |
| CALLOUT | Label objects with callout text | text |
| CAROUSEL | Configure plotter pen carousels | plot |
| CASCADE | Arrange all open views so that all the view names are visible | view |
| CASE | Replaced by TEXTCASE | text |
| CAT | Create a catenary curve in the profile view | pline |
| CDSPROF | Create initial design profile for a cul-de-sac or kerb return | alignment |
| CENVIEW | Re-centre views based on chainage | display |
| CF2SUPER | Compute superelevation from existing crossfall | alignment |
| CHAINAGE | Set the start chainage (or beginning station) of a HAL | alignment |
| CHEKROAD | Check and correct roadway alignment registration | alignment |
| CHNGCOLR | Change colour ByLayer to colour by colour number | colour |
| CHNGHEIG | Change elevation by point name | elevation |
| CHNGNAME | Replace selected characters in names based on a dictionary | name |
| CHNGTEXT | Replace selected text based on a dictionary | text |
| CHOSDIFF | Report chainage, offset and height difference from DTM | report |
| CHTXT | Convert stationing text to chainage text | text |
| CIRCLE | Create a circular pline | pline |
| CLEANSET | Remove unnecessary points from sets | set |
| CLEARMESS | Clear text from the message scroll display | display |
| CLIP | Clip plines or sets at closed boundaries. | pline, set |
| CLOSE | Close the current project | file |
| CLOSEFIG | Close selected lines | set |
| CLS | See CLEARMESS | display |
| COLOR | Modify the color of selected objects | colour |
| COLORCODE | Color points relative to the current roadway | colour |
| COLORCON | Colour contours by contour interval | colour |
| COLORPT | Colour points by contour interval | colour |
| COLOUR | Modify the colour of selected objects | colour |
| COLOURCODE | Colour points relative to the current roadway | colour |
| COLOURCON | See COLORCON | colour |
| COLRLINE | Modify the colour and linetypes by layer mapping file | colour |
| COMMAND | Bring up a command line | command |
| CommandToggle | Toggle the visibility of the command line | command |
| COMPASS | Place a hydrographic compass rose | nav |
| CONNECT | Connect two sets of the same type, forming a single set | set |
| CONTENTS | Same as HELP | help |
| CONTOUR | Extract contour plines from a DTM | dtm |
| ContourAtElev | Create plines at a specified contour elevation | dtm |
| CONTOURSET | Configure contour interval | dtm |
| CONTOURVOL | Compute volumes from contours | dtm |
| CONVERT | Convert plines to sets or sets to plines | set, pline |
| CONVSET | Slope Convention settings | config |
| COORDCON | Transform coordinates of points by projection | transform |
| COORDS | Coordinate scroll display | display |
| COPY | Copy selected objects | sets, plines |
| COPYROAD | Copy a roadjob to a new roadjob | road |
| COPYRWAY | Copy a roadway to a different roadjob | road |
| COPYTEMP | Copy a roadway template to other templates with the same name | road |
| CORDSCRL | Recover lost coordinate scroll | display |
| COUNT | Count the number of objects of each type in each view | report |
| CRDTABLE | Create a linked coordinate table | report |
| CREATELL | Import layer lists and layers | import, layer |
| CROSSCHK | Check for crossing lines | set |
| CROWFOOT | Toggle arrow heads on segment text leader lines | toggle |
| CSMAN | Coordinate System Manager | config |
| CSTAKE | Print the slope staking reports | report |
| CSTAKING | Same as CSTAKE | report |
| CTAB | Replaced by CRDTABLE | report |
| CULDESAC | Create and draw a Cul-de-Sac | set |
| CURSOR | Limit the direction and increment of cursor movement | display |
| CURVE | Insert or edit pline curve | alignment |
| CURVESOL | Solve a curve | pline, set |
| CUTFILL | Balance cut and fill volumes (metric) | dtm |
| CUTFILLA | Balance cut and fill volumes (feet) | dtm |
| CVD5EXPT | Export to Civilcad 5 AS5 | export |
| CVD5IMPT | Import from Civilcad 5 AS5 | import |
| CVDEXPT | Export to Civilcad 4 ASC | export |
| CVDIMPT | Import from Civilcad 4 ASC | import |
| DCEDIT | Trimble DC File Editor | import/export |
| DDIST | Create a point at the intersection of two arcs or distances | point |
| DEFANG | Display angle between two bearings | report |
| DELBLKS | Delete missing external blocks | block |
| DELETE | Delete record | delete |
| DELETESEGMENT | Delete segment | delete |
| DESC | Change numeric names to alphanumeric | text |
| DESCAD | Change numeric names to alphanumeric using multi and global codes | text |
| DESIGN | Project batters from a design DTM | dtm |
| DESIGNELEV | Modify elevation to design roadway elevation | road |
| DESIGNSET | Configure design settings | config |
| DESPIKE | Removes spikes from a DTM | dtm |
| DFEDIT | Data Format Editor | import/export |
| DIAG | Trimble diagnostic report | report |
| DIM | Dimension sets and plines | text |
| DISJOIN | Break sets and plines into segments | set |
| DISPFEAT | Display feature attributes | attribute |
| DISPLAYSET | Control object display | view |
| DISTANCE | Display the distance between two locations | report |
| DIVIDE | Divide a line into intervals | points |
| DLGDOIN | Import USGS DLG-O file | import |
| DLGDOOUT | Export USGS DLG-O file | export |
| DLINE | Dimension between two locations | text |
| DOCUMENTS | List Terramodel documents | help |
| DPAD | Replaced by MOVEPAD | set |
| DRAFTSET | Drafting settings | config |
| DRAPE | Create sets where selected plines cross DTM links | dtm |
| DRAGHDIN | Import Drag Head log file | import |
| DRAINRPT | Drainage detail report | report |
| DRILL01 | Label a drill hole | text |
| DRNGRADE | Label segment with grade and direction | text |
| DTM2LDBX | Export a DTM as Leica 1200 DBX database | export |
| DTM2XML | Export a DTM as LandXML | export |
| DTMALL | Relink all DTM layers and refresh | dtm |
| DTMAREA | Report the planimetric and surface areas of a DTM layer | dtm |
| DTMBYLL | Replaced by GCCOPY | dtm |
| DTMCH | Select the current DTM layer | dtm |
| DTMCONE | Create a cone from a point to a DTM | set |
| DTMEDGE | Create a set around a DTM edge | dtm |
| DTMGRID | Interpolate a grid of points over a DTM | dtm |
| DTMINFO | Report which layers are linked for DTMs | dtm |
| DTMMATCH | Match overlapping DTMs | dtm |
| DTMMATH | Create points by comparison with two DTMs | dtm |
| DTMPTS | Interpolate elevations of points from a DTM | dtm |
| DTMSET | Create sets of triangle sides on a DTM | dtm |
| DTMSHOT | Create a point on a DTM at a grade and bearing | dtm |
| DTMSTATS | Display the highest and lowest elevations of points in a layer | report |
| DTMUPDT | Relink the current DTM layer and refresh | dtm |
| DUMPATT | Report the attribute records stored for a selected object | report |
| DUPLTRIS | Remove duplicated segments from triangular sets | set |
| DXFCHANG | Relayer all layers in a DXF file according to a map file | export |
| DYNAVIEW | Create a dynaview | plot |
| EARTHWORK | Compute volume of cut and fill between two DTMs | report |
| EARTHWRK | Roadway volume report | report |
| EDIT | Edit object | object |
| ELBLK | Replaced by PTBLKS | point |
| ELE2NAME | Change name of objects to match their elevations. | name |
| ELEVALONGSET | Set the elevation of points along a set | set |
| ELEVATION | Replaced by GCELEV | elevation |
| ELEVOBJS | Interpolate elevation of points, text and blocks from DTM | DTM |
| ELEVREFPLANE | Modify elevation of points by reference plane | elevation |
| ELEVREFPT | Modify elevation of points to reference point | elevation |
| ELFS | Elevation and grade from chainage | profile |
| ELLIPSE | Create an ellipse | pline |
| ELTXT | Elevation from text | point |
| ELVPLINE | Interpolates average elevation of plines from DTM | plines |
| EMXSALIGN | Import a Geopak alignment | import |
| ERR_ELIP | Add error ellipse attributes | attribute |
| EVALDTM | Report invalid points and sets in a DTM layer | dtm |
| EXEC | Execute an external program | config |
| EXIT | Exit Terramodel | save |
| EXPLODE | Explode blocks, text and complex linetypes. | set |
| EXPLORE | Open Windows Explorer | exec |
| EXPORT | Export data using scripts | export |
| EXPORTGC | Export or report cross sections in Geocomp format | export |
| EXPORTSMGR | Export script manager | export |
| EXPORTXS | Export cross section data in Terramodel .XSC format | export |
| EXTEND | Extend a line | pline, set |
| FAVORITES | Favorite (or favourite) commands | config |
| FACTZ | Replaced by SCALEELV | points |
| FBLOCK | Import ASCII points file in rectangular blocks | import |
| FILLET | Create a curve by radius at the intersection of two segments | pline, set |
| FILTER | Filter vertices in plines | pline |
| FIXDYNA | Replace dynaviewed plotboxes with new plotbox records | plot |
| FIXLAYERS | Fix layers that do not compute end-area volumes | dtm |
| FLIPDOWN | Copy points and sets from an elevation view to a plan view | view |
| FLIPUP | Copy points and sets from a plan view into an elevation view | view |
| FONTCHNG | List or change fonts used by selected text | text |
| FORESTRD | Apply horizontal design criteria to a road alignment | road |
| FORESTTB | Report offsets for a forest road. | road |
| FRGOUT | Export Fastmap 700 Full Road Geometry file | export |
| FTCODEIN | Export Fastmap 700 Full Road Geometry file | export |
| F7 | Toggle point number display on/off | point label |
| F8 | Toggle circle symbol on/off | point label |
| F8C | Toggle preset symbol on/off | point label |
| F8T | Place markers on points | mark |
| F9 | Toggle elevation display on/off | point label |
| F11 | Toggle name display on/off | point label |
| GARMININ | Import Garmin GPS Waypoint (.wpt) File | import |
| GARMINOU | Export Garmin GPS Waypoint (.wpt) File | export |
| GC01 | Truncate the name of selected objects | text |
| GC02 | Change name to the chainage & offset from HAL | text |
| GC03 | Report chainage and offset from HAL and VAL | report |
| GC03A | Report chainage and offset from master HAL | report |
| GC03DRN | Report chainage (horizontal), offset and design offset from HAL and VAL | report |
| GC03DUAL | Report chainage and offset from two HAL and VAL pairs | report |
| GC04 | Create mid-points on short plines | point |
| GC05 | Calculate the centre of mass between two DTMs | report |
| GC06 | Round elevations in project file | point |
| GC07 | Helmert transformation | transform |
| GC08 | Part of RDX_GC and XSHEETGC | plot |
| GC09 | Place blocks and symbols by group | blocks |
| GC10 | List and sum area, 2D length and 3D length for printing | report |
| GC100 | Report thickness between two DTMs | report |
| GC10CSV | List and sum area, 2D length and 3D length for spreadsheet | report |
| GC12DIN | Import 12D Model ASCII file | import |
| GC12DOUT | Export 12D Model ASCII file | export |
| GC14 | Report chainage (along slope) and offset from HAL and VAL | report |
| GC14S | Report sorted chainage (along slope) and offset from HAL and VAL | report |
| GC14SET | Report chainage (along slope) and offset from set | report |
| GC14R | Report chainage and offset in TMS ProFit XY format | report |
| GC15 | Delete selected lines with specified total length | pline, set |
| GC16 | Change line colour and linestyle using GEOCOMP.CLT | colour |
| GC16ADC | Change line colour and linestyle using AutoDraft report | colour |
| GC17 | Calculate intersection with DTM given bearing and slope from set | point |
| GC18 | Report chainage and elevation along a VAL | report |
| GC20 | Compute and check cut/fill volumes within boundaries | report |
| GC21 | Change the default callout style | text |
| GC22 | Check DTM edge and design boundaries | sets |
| GC23 | Create a set where slopes from points intersect a DTM | sets |
| GC24 | Adjust a lot or traverse by Bowditch | survey |
| GC25 | Compute a single isopach or cut/fill line between two DTMs | dtm |
| GC25MULT | Compute multiple isopachs between two DTMs. | dtm |
| GC26 | Create an attribute record for an object | config |
| GC26GIS | Create an attribute record in MS Access for an object | config |
| GC27 | Place chainage labels parallel to xlines | text |
| GC28 | Create 3D points along HAL & VAL with name = ch | alignment |
| GC28A | Create 3D points along HAL & VAL | alignment |
| GC29 | Compute distance & direction with 3D components | report |
| GC29UTM | Compute ellipsoidal distance & direction | report |
| GC30 | Report coordinates and elevation difference to DTM | report |
| GC30A | Report coordinates and elevation difference to DTM with alignment | report |
| GC30PERP | Report coordinates and elevation difference perpendicular to DTM | report |
| GC31 | Remove duplicate points on a layer with tolerances | point |
| GC32 | Report visible layers in LayerLists | report |
| GC33 | Create a DTM from the upper or lower of two DTMs | dtm |
| GC33MULT | Create a DTM from the upper or lower of multiple DTMs | dtm |
| GC34 | Find and report a point by number | mark |
| GC35 | Create points at centroids of a plines or sets | point |
| GC36 | Move points onto a HAL | point |
| GC37 | Create cross sections by intersecting strings at xlines | export |
| GC38 | Affine transformation | transform |
| GC383D | Replaced by GC3DADJ | point |
| GC39 | Move a HAL IP and update Xlines | road |
| GC3DADJ | 3D conformal transformation | transform |
| GC3DROT | Rotate in 3D around 0,0,0 | transform |
| GC3DSETS | Find the closest 3D distance between two sets | set |
| GC3PTARC | Create a two-arc set through three points | set |
| GC40 | Compare points in two layers by coordinate | report |
| GC40A | Compare points in two layers by coordinate using search ranges | report |
| GC40M | Compare points in two layers by coordinate using alignment | report |
| GC40PILE | Compare pile points in two layers | report |
| GC40RAKE | Report pile rake by comparing points at top and bottom | report |
| GC40TEXT | Label points in two layers with differences | text |
| GC41 | Show obstructions in profile view | road |
| GC42 | Report elevation minus roadway elevation | report |
| GC42AB | Compare as-built points within tolerance with roadway design | report |
| GC42ABS | Select as-built points within tolerance of roadway design | select |
| GC42DTM | Compare DTM with roadway design | report |
| GC42HAL | Compare as-built points with HAL in selected Roadway | report |
| GC42KB | Compare as-built points with HAL and design kerb set | report |
| GC42VAL | Compare as-built points with VAL in selected Roadway | report |
| GC43 | Report surface areas of shapes in a roadjob | report |
| GC43CSV | Report surface areas of shapes in a roadjob to CSV | report |
| GC43S | Report surface areas of shapes in a roadjob within a material | report |
| GC43SCSV | Report surface areas of shapes in a roadjob within a material to a CSV file | report |
| GC44 | Report surface areas of a DTM by slope and chainage | report |
| GC44CSV | Report surface areas of a DTM by slope and chainage to CSV | report |
| GC44S | Report surface areas of a DTM by slope and chainage within a material | report |
| GC45 | Create points along a HAL or VAL at incremental distances | point |
| GC46 | Compute cut volumes between surfaces within blocks | report |
| GC47 | Road resheet profiles | road |
| GC48 | Extract profiles from roadway shapes | road |
| GC49 | Create a point on a line given elevation | point |
| GC50 | Grade a set from known points | set |
| GC51 | Intersection design | road |
| GC52 | Change group of selected objects | group |
| GC53 | Create, list or highlight non-contourable points | dtm |
| GC54 | Apply geoid-spheroid correction from a DTM | nav |
| GC55 | Extrapolate heights from two 3D sets perpendicular onto a set | point |
| GC55HAL | Extrapolate heights from two 3D sets perpendicular to HAL onto a set | point |
| GC56 | Swap in X, Y or Z | point |
| GC57 | Create points from cross sections | road |
| GC58 | Remove duplicate sets, plines and text | sets, plines, text |
| GC59 | Quality Assurance report from Geodimeter as-built survey | report |
| GC60 | Radial setout report | report |
| GC61 | Create a point at a distance between two points | point |
| GC62 | Replaced by ELFS | alignment |
| GC63 | Intersect batter defined by two sets with DTM | road |
| GC64 | Intersect two slopes each defined by two sets | road |
| GC64BIT | Fix initialisation to suit 64-bit or 32-bit Windows | config |
| GC65 | Create point at chainage, offset and elevation along alignment | alignment |
| GC65FILE | Import points by chainage, offset and elevation | alignment |
| GC66 | Create breaklines at ridges, valleys or changes of grade | sets |
| GC67 | Move points onto perpendicular Xlines | alignment |
| GC67A | Move points onto skewed Xlines | alignment |
| GC68 | Add points into sets based on maximum horizontal distance | sets |
| GC69 | Change zero elevations to no elevation | points |
| GC70 | Combine elevation of point and DTM | dtm |
| GC71 | Hatch line marking | hatch |
| GC72 | Report satellite horizon curtain | report |
| GC73 | Interpolate elevation from VAL | alignment |
| GC74 | Set the start chainage of multiple sets or plines | alignment |
| GC75 | Report distance and slope between sets or plines | report |
| GC76 | Report on Geodimeter job file | report |
| GC77 | Change elevation of text to match elevation of subject | text |
| GC78 | Import profiles into profile view | profile |
| GC79 | Renumber points to same as point names | point |
| GC80 | Compare sum of lot areas against boundary | report |
| GC81 | Report alignment | report |
| GC82 | Compute DTM slope areas within a boundary | report |
| GC83 | Select objects less than or greater than specified length | config |
| GC84 | Join multiple plines | pline |
| GC85 | Replaced by CLEANSET | set |
| GC86 | Move points relative to alignment | alignment |
| GC87 | Create an elevation DTM from another elevation DTM and a difference DTM | alignment |
| GC88 | Clip or extend a pline to a defined length | pline |
| GC89 | Create a DTM perpendicular to another DTM | dtm |
| GC90 | Extend DTM to point | dtm |
| GC91 | Extend DTM by distance | dtm |
| GC92 | Report or move duplicate points | dtm |
| GC93 | Mirror or rotate point label | point label |
| GC94 | Report crossfall between two sets | report |
| GC95 | Delete set segments greater than a nominated length | set |
| GC96 | Select points between two DTM layers | dtm |
| GC99 | Create parallel strings at offsets from alignment | sets |
| GC100 | See GC100 | report |
| GCABOUT | See GCHELP | config, report |
| GCACTIVE | Select active alignment from registered alignments | alignment |
| GCADDLAY | Prefix name with first 4 characters from layer name | name |
| GCADJANT | Adjust points for a non-vertical antenna | survey |
| GCADJDES | Adjust points for new vertical alignment | alignment |
| GCANG | Report and label angle-right between points | text |
| GCARC | Create arc pline or set by three parameters | set |
| GCARCBL | Create invisible breaklines along all arcs on a layer | dtm, set |
| GCBADEAT | Delete or select text containing Bad Rec EAT codes | text |
| GCBLKPTS | Create points at the insertion points of blocks | block |
| GCBOUND | Match extents of boundaries | dtm |
| GCCHRLIN | Import profile from file of chainage and elevation | profile |
| GCCL | Create PPS Tunnelling System CL file | alignment |
| GCCLIP | Create new DTM surfaces clipped to boundaries | dtm |
| GCCOLCON | Modify colours of positive, zero, and negative contours | pline |
| GCCONCHK | Change elevation of 2D points to match others in set | set |
| GCCONIN | Import Geocomp contour file | import |
| GCCONOUT | Export Geocomp contour file | export |
| GCCONTXT | Set elevations of labelled contours | pline |
| GCCONVRT | Convert plines to sets or sets to plines | set, pline |
| GCCOORD | Transform coordinates of points, plines, text and blocks | transform |
| GCCOPY | Copy objects onto a layer, while retaining other properties | sets |
| GCCSVIN | Import comma-separated ASCII coordinate files | import |
| GCDAMVOL | Compute dam volumes with increments | dtm |
| GCDCOUT | Export alignments to Trimble DC files | alignment |
| GCDELSET | Delete sets and points in sets | set |
| GCDESC | Replaced by F11 | toggle |
| GCDESCRL | Replaced by F11 | toggle |
| GCDIMLOT | Label lots with dimension text | text |
| GCDTM | Relayer objects into a DTM layer using a .dtp file | dtm |
| GCDTMALL | Create arc breaklines, relink all DTM layers and refresh | dtm |
| GCDTMGDE | Interpolate superelevation profiles from DTM | alignment |
| GCDTMDIF | Report elevation differences between three DTMs at cursor | dtm |
| GCDTMIN | Import a Geocomp .DTM file | import |
| GCDTMOUT | Export a layer as a Geocomp .DTM file | export |
| GCEARTH | Roadway volume report in columns | report |
| GCEDTATB | Edit feature attributes | attribute |
| GCELEV | Modify the elevation of selected objects | elevation |
| GCESRIIN | Import ESRI ArcInfo ARC DEM grid files | import |
| GCEXPLOD | Explode blocks and text retaining layers, names and elevations | block |
| GCFALL | Create a pline indicating fall from a location | dtm, pline |
| GCFILTER | Filter excess points from straights and arcs in 2D sets | set |
| GCGENGRD | Create points on a grid pattern | points |
| GCGPXIN | Import GPS data in .GPX format | import |
| GCGRDVOL | Compute cut and fill volumes on a grid or between Xlines | report |
| GCGSIOUT | Export alignment in Leica RoadPlus GSI format | export |
| GCGT7IN | Import alignment in Topcon Civilcad GT7/GTS format | import |
| GCGTSOUT | Export alignment in Topcon Civilcad GC7/GTS format | export |
| GCHALADJ | Adjust registered hal to use offsets | alignment |
| GCHALDEL | Delete selected registered HALs | alignment |
| GCHALEDT | Edit a registered horizontal alignment graphically | alignment |
| GCHALIN | Import Geocomp Horizontal Alignment | import |
| GCHALOFF | Create a pline from a registered HAL with offsets | alignment |
| GCHALOUT | Export Geocomp Horizontal Alignment | export |
| GCHAULMN | Add Masshaul Import and Export materials from a CSV file | masshaul |
| GCHELP | Report configuration status and help links | report |
| GCIDCHN | Display chainage and offset in many views | import |
| GCIMPORT | Import Geocomp or survey data | import |
| GCINCTXT | Create text incrementing by multiples | text |
| GCINSBLK | Replace circles with trees | blocks |
| GCJOINMP | Join points with gaps | survey |
| GCJOINPT | Join points based on feature-coded name | survey |
| GCKMLIN | Import placemarks and paths from Google Earth (KML) | import |
| GCKMLOUT | Link to Google Earth, NearMap or HyperTiles | export |
| GCLABGRD | Label and draw grids inside polygons | draft |
| GCLABIP | Label intersection points | text |
| GCLABLOT | Label closed sets with lot area and lot number text | text |
| GCLABPEG | Label pipeline with peg labels | text |
| GCLABPNT | Label multiple points with EAT text, leaderline and border | text |
| GCLFAOUT | Export linear features for Quantm | Export |
| GCLINPTS | List points with invalid coordinates | point |
| GCLLGRID | Draw latitude and longitude grid | pline |
| GCLNGIN | Import Geocomp long section | import |
| GCLOTCNR | Label lot corners with two elevations | text |
| GCLPOINTS | Replaced by GCLPTS | report |
| GCLPTS | List the coordinates and group of the selected points | report |
| GCMAPOUT | Create a map file of object and layer names | export |
| GCMATCH | Close gaps in contours | pline |
| GCMATIN | Import road materials | road |
| GCMATOUT | Export road materials | road |
| GCMERGE | Merge multiple regions or DTMs | dtm |
| GCMFI | Import multiple ASCII PTS or CSV files | import |
| GCMOSSIN | Replaced by MOSSIN and MOSSTRI | import |
| GCMOSSOU | Replaced by MOSSOUT | export |
| GCMULCON | Assign contour elevations to multiple plines | pline |
| GCMULTDC | Export multiple alignments to a Trimble DC file | alignment |
| GCMULTGD | Export multiple alignments to Geodimeter .rln files | alignment |
| GCMULVOL | Compute cut/fill volumes between pairs of dtm surfaces | dtm |
| GCMULXML | Export multiple alignments to Leica 1200 LandXML files | alignment |
| GCNAMEPT | Name points sequentially along a set | import |
| GCNEDIN | Import Quantm Grid (NED) .asc file | import |
| GCNMEAIN | Import NMEA strings from GPS receivers | import |
| GCNOELEV | Select points with no elevations (2D) | point |
| GCOFFELV | Create plines or sets offset from a set | sets |
| GCOFLINE | Select points of multiple selected sets. | set |
| GCONECON | Assign contour elevations to selected plines | pline |
| GCOUT | Export data to Geocomp SDS (.PTS & .STR) | export |
| GCP39 | Replaced by GCRLNOUT | export |
| GCPAD | Place building pads at nominated height within a lot | set |
| GCPAN | Pan by numeric keypad with 8 = north | plot |
| GCPANEL | Create concrete roadway batter panel set out points | roadway |
| GCPAVSET | Create a PaveSet paving machine setout file | export |
| GCPILE | Create pile points using HAL & VAL | alignment |
| GCPLDICE | Create plines for line marking | pline |
| GCPLFIN | Import HP-GL/2 (.PLF, .HPG, .GL2, .PLT, .000) plot file | import |
| GCPLTIN | Import Geocomp .PLT plot file | import |
| GCPRFEDT | Edit profile IPs graphically | profile |
| GCPROFIL | Create profiles from multiple DTMs in a layerlist | profile |
| GCPTAIN | Import data from TPSetout/TPStakeout .PTA survey points file | import |
| GCPTDIST | Check minimum distances between points on sets | report |
| GCPTRLDS | Replaced by F11 | toggle |
| GCPTSIN | Import point data from an ASCII file | import |
| GCPTSOUT | Export points to various ASCII formats | export |
| GCPTSTXT | Change elevation or name of points by nearest text | point |
| GCQA | Report chainage, offset and elevation difference to DTM | report |
| GCQP | Interactive quick profile | profile |
| GCQV | Move a HAL IP and recompute roadway volume | report |
| GCREDRAW | Redraw all views and reset scale for point labels | view |
| GCRELAY | Replaced by GCCOPY | layer |
| GCREPORT | Open P3Pad report editor | report |
| GCRENUM | Renumber points in set order | point |
| GCREVIEW | Move or copy objects from one view to another | view |
| GCRIVER | Interpolate elevations onto a digitised river | set |
| GCRLNOUT | Export Geodimeter Roadline alignments from strings | export |
| GCSDROUT | Export Sokkia SDR alignment files | export |
| GCSKIPMN | Replace skip ranges by CSV or pline boxes | alignment |
| GCSTRATA | Create points at strata from table of depths | DTM |
| GCSUBGDE | Create plines to transition subgrade templates | alignment |
| GCSURFAR | Replaced by XSURAREA | report |
| GCSZAOUT | Export special zones for Quantm | export |
| GCTADPOL | Label batter with block showing direction of slope | block |
| GCTMAIN | Import Quantm DTM | import |
| GCTMAOUT | Export DTM for Quantm | export |
| GCTRACE | Define a boundary by tracing inside multiple selected plines or sets. | set, pline, hatch, report |
| GCTSP | Add Geocomp module to Terramodel Search Path | config |
| GCTSTYLE | Set the current text style | text |
| GCTTAOUT | Export a set to Trimble .tta and .ttx | export |
| GCTUNNEL | Export LandXML for Leica RoadRunner Tunnel | export |
| GCTURN | Compute swept path of vehicle | road |
| GCUMC3D | Export to Leica Universal Machine Control 3D | export |
| GCUNJOIN | Break sets and plines into segments | set |
| GCUPDATE | Part of the Geocomp Update | config |
| GCVALDEL | Delete selected registered VALs | alignment |
| GCVALEDT | Move a vertical alignment IP | alignment |
| GCVALOFF | Create a pline from a registered VAL with offsets | alignment |
| GCVERIN | Import Geocomp vertical alignment | import |
| GCVEROUT | Export Geocomp vertical alignment | export |
| GCWRAP | Change tunnel wrap status of a layer | dtm |
| GCXLINES | Create or replace labelled xlines for a roadway | road |
| GCXMLIN | Import LandXML points within boundaries | import |
| GCXMLOUT | Export roadway strings to LandXML | road |
| GDACONV | Replaced by GCCOORD | nav |
| GDMDIR | List Geodimeter directory and delete files | survey |
| GEOC_PAL | Add GeoNav palettes | nav |
| GEOMINQ | Measure segments | report |
| GEOMRPTS | Report Bearings and Distances | report |
| GEONAV | Replaced by HDMS | nav |
| GEOSYS | Establish GPS geodetic system | config |
| GFE | Geodimeter file editor | survey |
| GM1 | Change slopes of triangles to within slope limit | point |
| GNCSTEXP | Part of HDMS | export |
| GNCSTIMP | Part of HDMS | import |
| GNDWEED | Replaced by HDMS | nav |
| GNHLAB | Replaced by HDMS | nav |
| GNIMPORT | Replaced by HDMS | import |
| GNSETUP | Replaced by HDMS | config |
| GOLDER | Import data from a Golder Associates format | import |
| GOLFAREA | Report golf course areas | report |
| GPSSYS | Replaced by GEOSYS | config |
| GPXOUT | Export Topografix GPX points for GPS | export |
| GRADESMT | Export files to Leica Geosystems GradeSmart 3D Machine Control for graders | export |
| GRDPTS | Interpolate an ASCII X,Y,Z file from a DTM and grid | export |
| GRIDELEV | Create a grid of points and interpolates elevations | dtm |
| GRIDEXPT | Export a grid of points interpolated from a DTM | export |
| GRIDMAKE | Create points or plines using grid settings | points |
| GRIDSET | Set the current grid settings | config |
| GRIDVOL | Compute cut and fill volumes on a grid | report |
| GRP2NAME | Change the name of each object to match its group | group |
| GSIDTMOU | Export a layer in Leica DTM Stakeout GSI format | export |
| GSSWP | Geocomp Systems Support web page | report |
| GST | Geodimeter Software Tools | survey |
| HALDATA | Create horizontal alignment by table entry | alignment |
| HALMANAGER | Register horizontal alignments | alignment |
| HALVALRP | Report horizontal and vertical alignments | report |
| HATCH | Hatch regions enclosed by boundaries | hatch |
| HATCHENC | Hatch the region enclosed by selected objects | hatch |
| HATCH_IT | Replaced by HATCHENC | hatch |
| HATCHPAT | Hatch regions with a selected hatch pattern | hatch |
| HATCHUSER | Hatch regions with a user-defined pattern | hatch |
| HDMS | Hydrographic Data Management System | nav |
| HDMSBABT | Part of HDMS | nav |
| HDMSBIN | Part of HDMS | nav |
| HDMSCOL | Part of HDMS | nav |
| HDMSCSL | Part of HDMS | nav |
| HDMSDCLBLK | Create hatching coloured by depth | hatch, nav |
| HDMSDLAB | Part of HDMS | nav |
| HDMSDW | Part of HDMS | nav |
| HDMSEVT | Part of HDMS | nav |
| HDMSRLAB | Part of HDMS | nav |
| HDMSRTR | Part of HDMS | nav |
| HDMSTC | Part of HDMS | nav |
| HDMSTLAB | Part of HDMS | nav |
| HECIN | Import a HEC-RAS Geometry file | import |
| HECOUT | Export a HEC-RAS Geometry file | export |
| HECOUTGC | Export a HEC-RAS Geometry file | export |
| HECX | Replaced by HECOUTGC | export |
| HELP | Open the Terramodel Help | help |
| HGNIMP | Part of HDMS | hdms |
| HIDE | Toggle the visibility of a set segment | toggle |
| HILO | Replaced by DTMSTATS | report |
| HYDRO | Replaced by HDMS | hdms |
| HYDROIMP | Part of HDMS | hdms |
| ID | Identify object | report |
| IDANGLE | Report the angle between two lines or three points | report | IDCHAINAGE | See IDSTATION | alignment |
| IDSTATION | Identify chainage and offset | alignment |
| IGRP | Display only objects in the same group | group |
| ILINE | Create points at intersections of selected lines | point |
| IMAGE | Image manager | image |
| IMAGEPTH | Change image file locations for Image manager | image |
| IMANAGER | Island manager | alignment |
| IMPORT | Import data using scripts | import |
| IMPORTGC | Import Geocomp .CES cross sections | import |
| IMPORTSMGR | Import script manager | import |
| IMPORTXS | Import various cross section formats into a roadway | import |
| INCHOFRL | Replaced by GC65FILE | import |
| INCRTEXT | Create text incrementing by one | text |
| INSALT | Import GeoNav Salt Harvester log files | import |
| INT3DSET | Create sets with elevations interpolated from known points | set |
| INTERP3D | Update elevations interpolated using INT3DSET | point |
| INTOSET | Insert points into a set | point |
| INVRPTS | Replaced by GEOMRPTS | report |
| IR_BAY | Design flood irrigation bays | irrigation |
| IR_BENT | Part of IR_BAY | irrigation |
| IR_BGRID | Part of IR_BAY | irrigation |
| IR_BTAB | Part of IR_BAY | irrigation |
| IR_CDTAB | Part of IR_BAY | irrigation |
| IR_DTMS | Part of IR_BAY | irrigation |
| IR_HAUL | Part of IR_BAY | irrigation |
| IR_SUMTX | Part of IR_BAY | irrigation |
| IR_UTILS | Part of IR_UTILS | irrigation |
| ISLAND | Traffic island editor | alignment |
| ITXT | Replaced by INCRTEXT | text |
| JOB2AGA | Convert a Geodimeter job file to a Geodimeter raw data file | survey |
| JOBOUT | Export a Geodimeter job file from points | export |
| JOIN | Join sets with common end points | set |
| KEAYSIN | Import data from Keays | import |
| KEAYSOUT | Export data to Keays TR1 | export |
| KORKDTM | Export DTM layer to Kork format | export |
| LABELANG | Label the angle-right at each point of a set | text |
| LABELARC | Label segment with radius as text along | text |
| LABELCONTOURS | Label contour plines with text | text |
| LABELGRID | Label a grid within a box | text |
| LABELHAL | Label horizontal alignment intersection points | alignment |
| LABELINE | Label alignments with names in plotboxes | alignment |
| LABELLOT | Change lot area labels to show alternative area | set, text |
| LABELPI | Label Intersection Point Chainage | alignment |
| LABELPOINT | Label points with point labels and symbols | point label |
| LABELROADHAL | Label a registered horizontal alignment | alignment |
| LABELROADVAL | Label a registered vertical alignment | alignment |
| LABELSEG | Label sets with bearings and distances | text |
| LABELSETS | Label sets with lot numbers and areas | text |
| LABELSTA | Label chainage using text leader lines | text |
| LABELTABLE | Create table of short lines and curve details | table |
| LABELVAL | Label vertical alignment intersection points | alignment |
| LABGRADE | Label grade between two points | text |
| LABPT | Label points with EAT text | text |
| LABPTQ | Label points with number, elevation or name | text |
| LANDFILL | Create a herringbone floor | sets |
| LAY2NAME | Change the name of each object to match its layer | layer |
| LAYER | Select current layer from a list | layer |
| LAYERMAP | Rename layers based on .map file | layer |
| LAYERNXT | Change the current layer to the next layer in alphabetical order | layer |
| LAYERSET | Create, edit and delete layers | layer |
| LAYINFO | List summary information by layer about selected points | layer |
| LAYLSET | Make only selected layerlist visible | layer |
| LAYOUT | Create parallel sets for subdivisions | sets |
| LAYUSTN | Relayer and colour objects for Microstation export | layer |
| LBLANG | Replaced by LABELANG | text |
| LC | Locate coordinate | point |
| LEVEL3W | Add or edit three-wire level (stadia) points | survey |
| LEVELLST | Report of all the level points | report |
| LEVELS | Add or edit single-wire level information | survey |
| LFILL | Replaced by LANDFILL | sets |
| LIDARGRD | Import LIDAR data in a grid | import |
| LIDARIN | Import LIDAR data | import |
| LINEINT | Evenly space points where X and Y is wrong | nav |
| LINETYPE | Modify the linetypes of selected sets and plines | plot |
| LINETYPESET | Load or purge linetypes | plot |
| LinetypeToggle | Toggle on or off the linetype selector on the toolbar | display |
| LINETYPS | Plot all loaded linetypes in the sheet view | plot |
| LINEZERO | Modify linetype to By Layer | linetype |
| LINKSET | Configure DTM links | dtm |
| LinkToggle | Toggle on and off DTM link display | dtm |
| LIST | List information about selected types of objects | report |
| LISTFONT | List and create a table of available fonts | text |
| LISTGRP | List groups used by selected objects | group |
| LISTLOTS | List geometry of lots | report |
| LISTPIPE | List as-constructed pipe data | report |
| LISTTEXT | List text objects | report |
| LLAYER | Report all the layers and the number of objects on each layer | layer |
| LLGRID | Draw Latitude and Longitude grids and labels | nav |
| LLIST | Modify the layer list of multiple dynaviews | dynaview |
| LLISTSET | Layer list settings | dynaview |
| LLOTS | Create a chart showing block, lot, area and % area | plot |
| LLRPT | Layer and layer list list report | layer |
| LLTABLE | Create a linked coordinate table including latitude and longitude | report |
| LLTYPE | Change the linetype of the current layer | layer |
| LOADATT | Load or reload the specified attribute definition file | config |
| LOBJS | List objects and details | report |
| LOTJOIN | Create closed sets around text | lot |
| LOTPTRLS | Label points with existing and finished surface elevations | text |
| LPI | Replaced by LABELPI | alignment |
| LPLINES | List alignment details of a pline | report |
| LPOINTS | List the coordinates of the selected points | report |
| LPTCOLOR | Change the points colour of the current layer | layer |
| LPTSRAD | List coordinates and radiations | report |
| LSEC1 | Label long sections in Geocomp-style | plot |
| LSEC_UK | Label long sections in United Kingdom-style | plot |
| LSETS | List name and point numbers of sets | report |
| LSTA | Replaced by LABELSTA | text |
| LUNUSED | List the unused point numbers | report |
| LVC | Label points along a vertical curve | plot |
| LYR | Replaced by QUIKLSET | layer |
| LYRPROP | Edit layer properties | layer |
| MacroPlay | Play a macro | command |
| MacroRecord | Record a keystroke macro | command |
| MACROSAVE | See MACRORECORD | command |
| MAG600IN | Import Magellan Explorist 600 GPS UPT file | import |
| MAGELLIN | Import Magellan GPS UPT file | import |
| MAGELOUT | Export Magellan GPS Waypoint UPT file | export |
| MAGNIFY | Magnify view scale by a factor | view |
| MAPIIN | Import MapInfo MIF data | import |
| MAPINFOIN | Replaced by MAPIIN | import |
| MAPINFOOUT | Replaced by MAPIOUT | export |
| MAPIOUT | Export MapInfo MIF data | export |
| MAPPOINTS | Create linework from point names | survey |
| MASSDIAG | Scale an exploded masshaul diagram | masshaul |
| MASSHAUL | Create a masshaul diagram | masshaul |
| MASSIMPORT | Masshaul import and export locations | masshaul |
| MATCH | Modify objects by matching properties of another object | config |
| MATCHOBJ | Modify objects by matching properties of another object | config |
| MATERIALS | Material manager | road |
| MATRIX | Create a matrix of copies | copy |
| MDLIN | Import MDL autoscanning laser system *.CDU data | import |
| MEASUNIT | Configure measurement units | config |
| MENUCFG | Configure menu | config |
| MERGE | Merge DTMs | dtm |
| MessageScroll | Toggle the visibilty of the message scroll area. | display |
| MG1 | Label triangle with slope | point |
| MHIMPORT | Add a volume report for masshaul analysis | masshaul |
| MINMAPIN | Import a MineMap file. | import |
| MIRROR | Copy objects to a mirror image | pline, set |
| MIRRORDY | Mirror dynaviews | view |
| MKBLK | Create a 1, 2, or 3 point unit block | blocks |
| MKBLKINT | Convert selected external blocks to internal blocks | blocks |
| MKV | Place a temporary marker at each vertex | mark |
| MOSSEXPT | Replaced by MOSSOUT | export |
| MOSSIN | Import Survey, Design and Triangles from Moss GENIO data | import |
| MOSSMIN | Create a .MIN file from Moss GENIO features | import |
| MOSSOUT | Export Moss GENIO data | export |
| MOSSTRI | Replaced by MOSSIN | import |
| MOSSX | Replaced by MOSSOUT | export |
| MOVE | Move objects to another location | move |
| MOVEPAD | Move a pad DTM and display volumes | report |
| MSCAPEIN | Import Mincom Minescape grid data | import |
| MSFIXIT | Enable Help macros | help |
| MULTCODE | Insert multiple-code separators into names before field codes | survey |
| MULTICOPY | Create multiple copies of selected objects | copy |
| MultilayerDTM | Create a DTM from multiple layers | dtm |
| MULTIPIN | Import MultiPlane RTK survey file. | import |
| MVIEW | Create multiple dynaviews | view |
| MXVALIN | Import VAL from MX report | import |
| NAME | Modify the name of selected objects | name |
| NAME2LAY | Change layer to match object name | layer |
| NAMESETS | Rename unnamed sets to match point names | set |
| NEW | Start a new project | file |
| NEXTVIEW | Change the current view to the next open view | display |
| NFS | Change name to the chainage from HAL | name |
| NPSCHART | Draw a table of details of set or pline | plot |
| NS95 | Nikon NS-95 Database Utility | survey |
| OBJREG | Register Object to Sheet for ASAP | plot |
| OBJSNAP | Enable running object snap modes | config |
| OBSDIFF | Report vertical differences between obstructions | report |
| OFF | Turn off selected objects | view |
| OFFALL | Turn off all objects in the current view | view |
| OFFELEV | Create plines or sets offset from a set | set |
| OFFELEVM | Create plines or sets offset from multiple sets | set |
| OFFPERP | Create set vertically offset from selected set | set |
| OFFSEG | Create pline or set at a horizontal offset from a segment | set |
| OFFSETDIST | Create pline or set at a horizontal offset | set |
| OFFSETPOINT | Create pline or set at a horizontal offset and location | set |
| OLIST | Count the number of objects of each type in each view | report |
| OLIST2 | Count the number of objects of each type in each view to P3Pad | report |
| ON | Turn on selected objects | view |
| ONALL | Turn on all objects in the current view | view |
| ONGRP | Turn on all objects of nominated group | plot |
| OPEN | Open and existing project | file |
| ORDERFORM | Email a report of the dongle. | help |
| ORDERPRINT | Print a report of the dongle. | help |
| P29 | Roadline 2D export to Geodimeter | export |
| P39 | Geodimeter Roadline 3D file | export |
| P3PAD | See GCREPORT | report |
| PAD | Create a rectangular set at an elevation | set |
| PADDOWN | Lower all points in a pad by an increment | set |
| PADSHIFT | Set the shift value used by PADDOWN and PADUP | set |
| PADUP | Raise all points in a pad by an increment | set |
| PALETTE | Configure palette and colourmap | config |
| PAN | Move the display to a new location | view |
| PARABOLA | Create a parabola | set |
| PARKING | Create parking bays | set |
| PCHAINAGE | Same as PSTATION | alignment |
| PCOPY | Copy from a reverence project | file |
| PHASE | Phase editor | road |
| PHASEMAN | Phase manager | road |
| PHASENAMES | Phase names | road |
| PINSET | Insert point at intersection of two lines | point |
| PIPEINFO | Report pipe dimensions and cover | pipe |
| PIPEWELD | Compute the location of as-built pipe welds | pipe |
| PLAN2DBX | Export sets to Leica 1200 series DBX database | export |
| PLANPROF | Display the plan and profile views | display |
| PLANSET | Automatic Sheet Assembly and Production (ASAP) | plot |
| PLANSHEET | Display the plan and sheet views | display |
| PLAY | Replaced by PTLAYCOL | colour |
| PLINE | Create a pline | pline |
| PLOT | Plot plan to a printer | plot |
| PLOTBOX | Create a pline box using sheet units | plot, pline |
| PLOTSET | Plot parameter settings | plot, smooth |
| PLOTTERSET | Plotter configuration settings | plot |
| PLTO3D | Set elevations of plines | pline |
| POINT | Create a point | point |
| POLY | Replaced by POLYGON | set |
| POLYGON | Create n-sided polygon | set |
| PORTSC1 | List points showing heights as depths | nav |
| POWERGDE | Export to Leica PowerGrade 3D | export |
| PPS | Display the Plan, Profile and Sheet views | display |
| PPSX | Display the Plan, Profile, Super and Xsect views | display |
| PPX | Display the Plan, Profile and Xsect views | display |
| PPXS | Display the Plan, Profile Xsect and Super views | display |
| PREDAREA | Divide lots into predetermined areas | sets |
| PREVIOUS | Display the previous view | view |
| PRJCLNT | Project Data Management - Client (see PLANSET) | plot |
| PRJINFO | Project Data Management - General Info (see PLANSET) | plot |
| PRJLOC | Project Data Management - Location (see PLANSET) | plot |
| PRJLTEXT | Project Data Management - Link text to data (see PLANSET) | plot |
| PRJSTAFF | Project Data Management - Staff (see PLANSET) | plot |
| PRODUCTS | Display the serial number and modules | help |
| PROFILE | Create profile | alignment |
| PROJDATA | Project Data Management - Data (See PLANSET) | plot |
| PROJECTV | List and edit all project variables | config |
| PROJINFO | Enter and display user information about a project file | config |
| PROJVARS | Enter and display survey information about a project file | config |
| PSBOX | PLANSET Edit plot boxes | plot |
| PSINDEX | Place an PLANSET index of drawings and symbols | plot |
| PSMAN | PLANSET manager | plot |
| PSSET | Configure PLANSET | plot |
| PSSHEET | PLANSET sheet assembly | plot |
| PSTATION | Create points relative to a HAL | alignment |
| PSTYPE | Select PLANSET sheet type | plot |
| PTBLKS | Create points at the insertion point of 3D blocks | point |
| PTJOIN | Join points by sequential point number or name | sets |
| PTLAB | Edit point label blocks | blocks |
| PTLAYCOL | Relayer and colours POINTS using name | layer |
| PTS2NAME | Rename points to match point number | point |
| PTS2PROF | Copy points to profile view | alignment |
| PTS2TEXT | Export a coordinate list | export |
| PTS2TRV | Export a .TRV file from the selected points | export |
| PTSIN | Import point data from various ASCII file formats | import |
| PTSITE | Change elevation by elevation difference from a point | point |
| PTSITE2 | Change elevation by slope and distance from a point | point |
| PTSOUT | Output point data to various ASCII formats | export |
| PXPS | Display the Plan, Xsect, Profile and Super views | display |
| QISOLATE | Isolate or unisolate current layer | display |
| QPROFILE | Display profiles between two locations | profile |
| QSET | Create a set by bearing and distance | set |
| QSGRIDIN | Import Qsurv grid file | import |
| QSGRIDOU | Export to Qsurv grid file format | export |
| QSURVOUT | Export to Qsurv format | export |
| QUIKLSET | Quickly control the visibility of layers | layer |
| QV | Quick volumes by changing roadway HAL IP | report |
| RANGE | Report elevation range within a boundary or along a set | report |
| RCLTABLE | Create a table of arc properties | report |
| RDDESIGNCRIT | Select road design criteria | alignment |
| RDDESIGNSET | Road design settings | road, config |
| RDE | Raw data editor | survey |
| RDGUIDE | Road job workflow guide | road |
| RDSCACALN | Import a Caice alignment | import |
| RDSDTMSET | Road DTM settings | road |
| RDSECHO | Report entered roadway data | report |
| RDSGPALIGN | Import a Geopak alignment | import |
| RDSUTL | Road design utility | road |
| RDVALDESCRT | Select vertical alignment design criteria | alignment |
| RDVALEDIT | Edit a vertical alignment using design criteria | alignment |
| RDX | Create Cross Section plots | plot |
| RDX_GC | Create cross section plots with labels in a table | plot |
| RDXLINES | Create xlines on a roadway | road |
| READATTB | Add ATTRIB values from a Trimble DC file and add to point names | survey |
| REARLOTL | Make a rear lot line a single segment | sets |
| RECENTER | Pick a new location for the centre of the display | view |
| REDO | Restore the most recent changes made by Undo | 49 |
| REDRAW | Refresh the display of the current view | view |
| REFER | Refer selected objects to a parent alignment | alignment |
| REFERENCE | Same as REFER | alignment |
| REFILE | Reference file mananger | file |
| REGALIGN | Register multiple alignments | alignment |
| REGROUP | Change the group of each object to match its layer | layer |
| RELAYER | Relayer selected objects | layer |
| RELAYERSETS | Relayer selected sets to current layer | layer |
| RELAYFIG | Relayer selected figures if they are closed | layer |
| RemoveLinks | Remove DTM links from a project | dtm |
| REMTRIS | Remove triangle segments joining a square grid of points. | set |
| RENUM | Renumber individual points | point |
| RENUMBER | Renumber multiple points | point |
| RENUMLOT | Renumber lots by adding an increment | set |
| RENUMREC | Renumber records | record |
| REPORTNEW | Replaced by GCREPORT | report |
| REPORTLT | Report bearings and distances of set segments | report |
| REPORTS | User defined reports | report |
| RESECT | Solve a 3-point resection problem | point |
| RESONIN | Part of HDMS | hdms |
| RETTABLE | Create a table of arc properties | report |
| RETURNS | Create a kerb return elevation table | report |
| REVERSE | Reverse the direction of selected objects | sets |
| REVIEW | Move objects from one view to another | view |
| RMGC | Link points to photos and text | config |
| ROADDTM | Create a DTM layer from Road cross sections | road |
| ROADGRID | Road design editor display grid | road |
| ROADJOB | Road Job Manager | road |
| ROADMAT | Road Job Materials | road |
| ROADRPT | Print a Road report | report |
| ROAD_RUN | Export alignment or roadway to Leica RoadRunner | export |
| ROADSETS | Create a DTM layer from Road cross sections | road |
| ROADSIGPOINT | Roadway masshaul significant points | masshaul |
| ROADSPOT | Report roadway details at a location | report |
| ROTATE | Rotate objects about a specified point | objects |
| ROT3D | Rotate points in 3D using 3 point pairs | points |
| SIDEVIEW | Replaced by FLIPUP | view |
| RPAN | Replaced by RECENTER | view |
| RTSCALE | Rotate, translate and scale | points |
| RUN | Execute an external file | config |
| RUNLINE | Part of HDMS | hdms |
| SAVE | Save the current project | save |
| SAVEAS | Save the current project with another name | save |
| SAWIMPT | Import South Australia Water Hydro files | import |
| SCALE | Multiply easting and northing by a scale factor | points |
| SCALEELV | Multiply elevations by a scale factor | points |
| SCALEGRID | Mass haul disgram grid settings | masshaul |
| SCLBLKS | Scale blocks by a factor | block |
| SCLPLOTB | Scale closed plines by a factor | dynaview |
| SCS900IN | Import Trimble SCS900 txt file | import |
| SCURVE | Create or edit a set curve | set |
| SEARCH | Search settings | config |
| SEGEDIT | Segment editor | set |
| SELECTGP | Select by group number | group |
| SET | Create a set | set |
| SET2PROF | Create a profile from a set | set |
| SET2PRFL | Create profiles representing a pipe | set |
| SET2ROAD | Create road jobs from sets | alignment |
| SET2TRV | Export a TRV file from the selected set | set |
| SETAREA | Compute area of inside one set and outside another | report |
| SETCH | Same as SETSTA | alignment |
| SETCURL | Set the current layer by picking an object | layer |
| SETFILT | Filter excess points from straights in a 2D set | set |
| SETGRP | Set the group to the next group | group |
| SETLABEL | Label sets with name | text |
| SETSMOOTH | Set the smoothness of selected sets | dtm |
| SETSTA | Set the beginning chainage to any point on an alignment | road |
| SFLOOR | Create a DTM surface in between two DTMs | dtm |
| SGRP | Set the group for selected objects | group |
| SHAPE | Shape Editor | road |
| SHAPECLASS | Shape class manager | road |
| SHAPEMAN | Shape library manager | road |
| SHAPESET | Create sets from roadway shapes | road |
| SHOWDIR | Show direction of selected object | report |
| SHOWDIRN | Show direction with option to reverse | report |
| SIDESLOPE | Project side slopes from alignment | dtm |
| SIDEVIEW | Replaced by FLIPUP | view |
| SIGHTDST | Compute vehicular sight lines | alignment |
| SKIP | Skip manager | alignment |
| SLICE | Interpolate batter points from HAL, VAL and side slope | points |
| SLL | Splined leader lines | plines |
| SLOPE | Identify DTM triangles within a slope range | dtm |
| SLOPEMANAGER | Register slope alignments | road |
| SMANAGER | Subgrade manager | road |
| SMPROAD | Create simple one-template roads or channels | road |
| SMPTMPL | Create simple road or channel template | road |
| SNAPLYR | Toggle the snapability of a layer | toggle |
| SNAPSET | Configure the cursor snap interval and direction | config |
| SNR | Search and replace | text, name |
| SOILNAIL | set | set |
| SPLAY | Cuts splay corners into lots | sets |
| SPLINE | Spline plines | pline |
| SPLITSET | Split lots into smaller lots | sets |
| SPOT | Display DTM elevation of a location | dtm |
| STAKE | Report angles, distances and coordinates for setout. | report |
| STAKED | Compare staked (as-built) points to design | report |
| STAKING | Configure the contents of a roadway staking report | config |
| STARNET | Import a STAR*NET .TER file. | config |
| STATION | Same as CHAINAGE | alignment |
| STATUSBAR | Status bar toggle. | Display |
| STEXT | Create single line text | text |
| STREAM | Create linework from a stream of locations | pline,set |
| STYLESET | Text syle settings | text |
| SUBGRADE | Subgrade editor | road |
| SUNSTAR | Create an azimuth based on star or sun shots | survey |
| SUPERELV | Superelevation editor | alignment |
| SUPERPLOT | Superelevation diagram | alignment |
| SUPERVIS | Site supervisor location tools | survey |
| SURFACE | Surface manager | road |
| SURFAREA | Create a report of the cut/fill surface area using average end area | report |
| SURPEXPT | Export a Surpac string file | export |
| SURPIMPT | Import a Surpac string file | import |
| SURVCEXP | Export roadway to Carlson SurvCE CL, PRO and SCT files | export |
| SVIEW | Open or change the state of a view | view |
| SW1 | Identify points on steep triangle edges | dtm |
| SYSTEM | Configure Terramodel system variables | config |
| TABLET | Configure a digitizer tablet | tconfig |
| TAKEOFF | Replaced by INT3DSET | sets |
| TANCIRCLE | Create a set tangent to two circles | set |
| TC* | Drill hole and blast pattern layout | application |
| TDIR | Set the bearing of selected text | text |
| TDS | Tripod Data Systems Survey Link DC | survey |
| TEMPLATE | Template editor | road |
| TEXT | Create text objects | text |
| TEXT2PNT | Create points at multiple insertion points of text or blocks | point, text |
| TEXT2PT | Create a point at the insertion point of text | point, text |
| TEXTALIGN | Align text objects in X or Y | text |
| TEXTALONG | Create a text object along a selected line. | text |
| TEXTARRO | Draw an arrow with text inside | text |
| TEXTCASE | Change the case of selected text | text |
| TEXTFIT | Change the aspect ratio of text | text |
| TEXTMETRICS | Change the font, rotation, orientation, height, justification, slant and aspect ratio of text | text |
| TEXTRND | Round selected bearings and distances for cadastral plans | text |
| TEXTROTATE | Changes the rotation angle of text | text |
| TEXTSCALE | Changes the scale of selected text | text |
| TEXTSWAP | Swap the text of two records | text |
| THREEPC | Two point arc from Three points | set |
| TILECENTRED | Tile views centred by chainage | display |
| TILEHORIZ | Tile views horizontally | display |
| TILEVERT | Tile views vertically | display |
| TLYR | Replaced by VISLYR | layer |
| TMANAGER | Template manager | road |
| TMGIS | Link Terramodel with a Microsoft Access database | report, import |
| TMLINK | Replaced by EXPORT and IMPORT | survey |
| TMLLIST | Display this TML list | report |
| TMRUN | See RUN | alias |
| TMXIN | Import Terramodel data | import |
| TMXOUT | Export Terramodel data | export |
| TOGLINKS | Toggle DTM links display | DTM |
| TOGQUICK | Toggle quick contours display | DTM |
| TOGSLOPE | Toggle triangle slope display | DTM |
| TOOLBOX | Create or edit toolboxes | config |
| TOWER | Replaced by DTMCONE | set |
| TP* | Pipeline design | pipeline |
| TPSETOUT | Export to TPSetout | export |
| TPSTKOUT | Export to TPStakeout | export |
| TRACE | Same as TRACEBDY | set |
| TRACEBDY | Create a set bounded by selected lines | set |
| TRACKPLOT | Part of HDMS | hdms |
| TRAV2D | Traverse and radiation entry | set |
| TRAVERSE | 3D Traverse and radiation entry | set |
| TRIM | Trim a line or arc | pline, set |
| TRISOL | Triangle solutions | report |
| TRMBGRID | Export a Trimble gridded DTM (.DTX) file. | dtm |
| TRMBROAD | Export a roadway to Trimble .tta or .ttx | export |
| TRMBTIN | Replaced by EXPORT Trimble DTM (TTM) | export |
| TRMBUTIL | Part of TRMBGRID | dtm |
| TRUEDIST | Report a segment length with an applied scale factor | report |
| TSP | Terramodel Search Path Browser | setup |
| TTMIN | Replaced by IMPORT Trimble DTM (TTM) | import |
| TTXOUT | Replaced by EXPORT Trimble Roading DC | export |
| TUNNELDTM | Unwrap a tunnel | dtm |
| TVLITE | 3D Visualiser | dtm |
| TWOPL | Curve from two points and a line | set |
| TXTFIT | Replaced by TEXTFIT | text |
| TXTIN | Import text from a file | text |
| TXTOUT | Export text to a file | text |
| TXTREFEL | Match elevation of text to point | text |
| TXTSW | Replaced by TEXTSWAP | text |
| UNDER | Create a profile of a pipe conduit under a road | pipe |
| UNDO | Undo changes | edit |
| UNHIDE | Make visible all segments of selected sets | set |
| UNITBLK | Place a block graphically using 1, 2 or 3 points | block |
| UNITSSET | Configure dimension mode, precision and labelling | config |
| USTN2MOS | Modify objects from Microstation to look like objects from GENIO. | import |
| UPGRADE | Enter an upgrade code to enable new Terramodel modules | help |
| UPTAKE | Replaced by INTERP3D | point |
| USER | See REPORTS | report |
| VALDATA | Enter a vertical alignment by a curve table | alignment |
| VALEDIT | Shift intersection points in a vertical alignment | road |
| VALMANAGER | Register vertical alignments | alignment |
| VARIOFF | Insert points of constantly varying offset from a selected alignment | road |
| VCLOSE | Close the active view | view |
| VICRDSEC | Create cross sections from cross section plots | road |
| VIEWROTATE | Rotate the display of the plan view | view |
| VIEWSCAL | Specify the plan view scale | view |
| VCLOSE | Configure the view settings | view |
| VISLYR | Toggle the visibilty of a layer | toggle |
| VMAX | Maximize the active view | view |
| VMIN | Minimize the active view | view |
| VNEW | Open a new view | view |
| VOLUME | Renamed and aliased to EARTHWORK | report |
| VPAN | Pan by numeric keypad with 1 = North | plot |
| VRECALL | Recall a saved view | view |
| VRESTORE | Restore a view | view |
| VRMLIN | Import Virtual Reality Markup Language (VRML) data | import |
| VRMLOUT | Export Virtual Reality Markup Language (VRML) data | export |
| VSAVE | Save a view | view |
| WALK | Create a pline given a DTM, a slope and a starting location | road |
| WESCOMIN | Import data from Wescom | import |
| WORDPAD | Open the Wordpad Editor | exec |
| XLINES | Create Xlines along plines | road |
| XLIN_PTS | Create Xlines of points near HAL | road |
| XSECTION | Export cross section from DTM | DTM |
| XSECTIONDIGI | Digitize cross sections | road |
| XSECTIONEDT | Edit cross sections | road |
| XSECTIONMAN | Manage cross sections | road |
| XSECTRPT | Report 3D length of cross sections | report |
| XSHEET | Create cross section plots in sheet view | plot |
| XSHEETGC | Create cross section plots in Geocomp-style | plot |
| XSLABEL | Add obstructions to cross section plots | plot |
| XSOUT | Export cross sections from points | export |
| XSURAREA | Report volume of road job surface areas to a spreadsheet | report |
| XTIE | Compute a line at the intersection of slopes from two segments | sets |
| XTOCL | Create walls for use in Terramodel Visualizer | visualizer |
| XVOLUMES | Report volume of all road job materials to a spreadsheet | report |
| ZI | Zoom in 2x | view |
| ZO | Zoom out 2x | view |
| ZOOM | Zoom in by window | view |
| ZOOMSCAL | Zoom active view to a scale | view |
The blue table below describes the operation and scope of each command summarised in the yellow table above.
We have omitted commands used in the Hydro and Pipe menus. Refer to Terramodel Help and manuals for these.
These details refer to Terramodel 10.61H with British English language and Geocomp Update, so the terminology and operation may vary from your release. Using ALIAS, French and Spanish commands are aliased to English commands.
At the end of each description, a short table shows the following information where available:
Click on the command name to go to the summary in the yellow table.
| NAME | DETAILS | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 3D | Create a set offset from a selected alignment.Create a set in the current layer connecting points at offsets from an alignment. The default horizontal and vertical offsets may be set to non-zero values. If a VAL is also selected from the Profile View, points are created with elevations interpolated from the VAL, adjusted by the vertical offset, otherwise the points are 2D. The default HAL is the active alignment, if set. The default VAL is a profile with the same name as the HAL, or a profile which refers to the HAL, if possible. See also GC28, GC99 and SIDESLOPE.
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 3DFILTER | Filter superfluous points from a DTM.This is useful for filtering point clouds generated by laser scanners, hydrographic surveys and other large DTMs where much of the data is not significant. Filter points on spikes, on similar grade and where removal would make insignificant changes to the volume. The filtered points be made moved to layer 0 or made non-contourable, and the point colour is also modified.
See also FILTER to filter plines, BLFILTER to filter along sets, GC31 to remove duplicate points and GC53 which changes and identifies non-contourable points. GCGEOCODE is a separate application, which can quickly filter points not close to an average surface model.
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 3DMCOUT | Create MCA file for Topcon 3D-MC Machine Control.Compute cross sections where xlines intersect selected 3D sets, then export hal, val and sections to a single MCA file and report to P3Pad. MCA files are the input files for the Topcon 3D-MC machine control system. Some newer Topcon 3D machine control systems use DXF instead. Check with your Topcon dealer.
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 3DPIPE | Report 3D lengths and angles of a set.Report the record number and name of a set, then the following values for each point: Back Point Number, Intersection Point Number, Forward Point Number, True 3D Angle, 3D Chainage of Intersection Point, Horizontal Deflection Angle, Vertical Deflection Angle, Bearing In, Bearing Out, 3D Distance In, 3D Distance Out, Zenith Angle In, Zenith Angle Out, Slope In and Slope Out. This information is especially useful for designing and laying out long pipe networks. The report can also be written as a CSV fle. See also PIPEINFO
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| ABBREVSET | Set prefix abbreviations for labelling and display.Abbreviations are used in display, reports, and labelling. They apply to both attribute text and text objects created while labeling. Once you have made changes to the abbreviations, attribute text will be updated when the display is redrawn, but text objects created by labeling must be re-labeled to be updated.
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| ABOUT | Report Terramodel version number and modules.Report Terramodel version number, Terramodel Toolpak version, copyright details, and list Modules. If there is no Products button, the Terramodel key cannot be found and Field data is the only module. If you were expecting other modules, including CAD, see www.geocomp.com.au/support/dongle.html. Click on the Modules button to see the list of modules:
See also GCHELP.
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| ACTIVE | Set, clear or list the current active alignment.
Active alignments are used for four main purposes:
See also GCACTIVE which selects the active alignment from alignments registered in HALMANAGER. See also REFER which refers objects to an alignment. PROFILE refers the profile it creates to the selected alignment. Objects in the profile are invisible if the are referenced to alignments other than the active alignment. If the selected algnment is referenced to another alignment, PROFILE will use the chainages of that other alignment.
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| ACTIVECHAINAGE | Set active chainage (station).Set, clear or list the current active alignment and chainage. If you selected US English during Terramodel installation, this command is called ACTIVESTATION and the command dialog and Settings menu will refer to Station. If British English, Chainage. When cross sections are drawn in the cross section view mode using RDX, RDX_GC, XSHEET or XSHEETGC, this command controls which chainage will be displayed. When these commands create the cross sections each object is referenced to the alignment and given the chainage of the cross section as the elevation of the object. Only those objects that are referenced to the active alignment and chainage will be shown. If there is no active alignment or chainage then all cross sections will be displayed, generally on top of each other. When any command creates objects in the cross section view the current active alignment and active chainage are used to make these objects a part of the cross section. If there is no active chainage or active alignment then any objects created will be displayed in any cross section. These simple rules enable all cross sections to be created in the same coordinate system (on top of each other) and then viewed one cross section at a time. This allows you to use coordinates of offset and elevation to draw, edit, inverse and so on. Options
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| ADD2NAME | Add prefix or suffix to names of selected points, sets or plines.Change the names of selected points to add a common prefix or suffix.
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| ADD2PTNO | Add prefix or suffix to selected point numbers.Change the point numbers of selected points to add a common prefix or suffix. If you are adding alpha characters, or any modified point number will exceed the "Max integer pn" in POINTSET, ensure that SYSTEM has sufficient "Max Alpha pts".
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| ADD2TXT | Add prefix or suffix to selected text.A common use is to add parentheses around text. Extended text objects with more than 255 characters are not supported.
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| ADDIMAGE | Add an image located by multiple plotboxes.Add one image to multiple plot boxes. The same image is added to image manager at the lower left and upper right extents of each selected plotbox. These plotboxes may be evenly spaced using MATRIX. If all the plotboxes are the same size and refer to a mastersheet, use ASAPIMAG.
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| ADDISO | Add the depth indicated by an isopach layer to the points contained within a DTM layer.Determine the depth of the isopach at the location of each point on a DTM surface, then add that depth to the elevation of selected points. If the DTM point is beyond the limits of the isopach layer's DTM edge, the point's elevation is unchanged. See also GC54.
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| ADDTIDES | Add tide corrections to depth records.Apply or reapply tide corrections from a tide file to selected depth records within a time period. The tide file must in the format dd/mm/yyyy,hh:mm:ss,t.ttt where t.ttt is the tide value in metres and correctly sorted by increasing date and time. Depth records are points with negative elevations when deeper than tide datum or positive when drying heights (above water). The point name must have been formatted by HDMS. Restore any HDMSRTR-rounded depths prior to running ADDTIDES. Relabel depths after running ADDTIDES.
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| ADJAREA | Adjust a lot to match a specified area.See also PREDAREA. In Terramodel 10 help, this TML is also called AdjustArea.
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| AIRVALVE | Label a pipe with airvalve blocks.Place blocks on a HAL and VAL to show the location of airvalves. The blocks must be named AirValvePlan and AirValveProfile. The blocks are placed at high points, such as airvalves, and low points, such as scour valves.
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| ALIAS | Create and edit command aliases.Use command aliases to call commands by command line, menu, toolbar or toolbox button, workspace using names and arguments of your choice. ALIAS command edits the current aliases. If you use a text editor, changes will take effect when Terramodel is restarted. ALIAS enables you to substitute for commands which need command line arguments or are unfamiliar, renamed, misspelled or replaced. You can make your own for a local language, dialect, idiom or standard. For example:
Aliases should be defined in an ALIAS.INI file in the Terramodel Search Path (TSP). The alias.ini installed by the Geocomp Update (...\Terramodel\Geocomp\ALIAS.INI) has over 2000 aliases including French and Spanish commands. If Terramodel is not finding your aliases, check the search path. If the correct ALIAS.INI is shown in TSP, then check whether there is a list of aliases in TMODWIN.INI. If so, these take precedence, so remove them and restart Terramodel. Use EXEC in an alias to execute an external command. The maximum argument is 66 characters. If you need to exceed this, see RUN. You can't alias to an alias, but you can copy the command and arguments using ALIAS command. To add comments to alias.ini, start the line with a semi-colon ";" so it is hidden in the Alias Editor. See also TMLLIST.
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| ALIGNIMP | Import alignments from an ASCII text file.Import HAL, VAL or SLOPE alignments with horizontal curve radii or vertical curve lengths from a comma-delimited file. Browse or enter the filename. The Settings control the Name, Colour, and Linetype for the alignment created. The check box "Adjust for HAL Equations", allows you to select the registered HAL from which to extract chainage equations. The current view determines how the file is interpreted. Where there is no curve, omit the value in [ ].
See also GC65FILE.
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| ALIGNOFF | Import alignments offsets from a text file.Import chainages and offsets for a horizontal or vertical alignment. These are added to the Alignment Offsets in the HAL or VAL Manager.
This will overwrite any already-registered HAL with the same name. See also GC65FILE.
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| ALIGNTXT | Make text perpendicular to alignment.Rotate selected text to be perpendicular to alignment. See also TEXTALIGN.
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
ALL
![]() |
Display all visible objects in the active view.Refresh the current view at a scale such that all visible all objects, except objects in blocks, are within the window. Use ALL to see the effect of changes to vertical exaggeration in VIEWSET.
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
ALT
![]() |
Enable menus for entry by keyboard.Enable the menu for key entry so you can then select a menu by pressing the underlined character then select an item from the menu, without using the Mouse. ALT is an ALIAS to MACROPLAY ALT which simulates the standard Windows functions of pressing ALT key or F10 function key.
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| ANG | Report angle-right between points.Reports the horizontal angle at an instrument point subtended to the right from the backsight point to the foresight point. Also reports the distance from the instrument point to the foresight point. Uses the current Angle Units setting. If all three of the coordinate locations are point objects, the point numbers will be displayed. See also IDANGLE, GCANG, GCLABIP and LABELANG.
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| ARC | Draw a pline arc from any three parameters.Choose one of 10 Types of arc, for example "Start, Center, End" or "3 Point". ARC defaults to the last Type used. If you need Sets, use CONVERT or GCCONVRT command to change the Plines to Sets, or use GCARC. The arc is drawn from the first point to the last point. If a radius is used, a negative radius will draw the arc on the right-hand side. The Terramodel Help, this is called ARCS.
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| ARC2P | Create an arc pline by two locations and a radius.The arc is drawn anti-clockwise to the left of the locations. Use a negative radius to draw the arc on the right-hand side. See also ARC, ARC2PSET and GCARC.
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| ARC2PSET | Create an arc set by two points and the radius.The arc is drawn from the first point to the second point. Use a negative radius to draw the arc on the right-hand side. See also ARC, ARC2P and GCARC.
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| ARCBL | Create breaklines along the arc segments of all sets on a designated DTM layer.Create points at regular intervals along the arc and connect a set from the existing first TP to each of the new points and finally to the end TP of the arc. The number of chords created is based on a specified maximum middle ordinate (arc-to-chord tolerance) value which indicates the maximum allowable deviation from the true arc for any breakline chord. The elevation of each point is interpolated along the arc from the elevations of the points at the arc TPs. If either TP has an undefined elevation, Breaklines will not be formed along that arc, and a warning message will be issued in the message area. The new sets are named "SETARCBL", and given the current line colour, so they can be selected separately from the arcs. See also GCARCBL to make the chords invisible and BLFILTER to filters out excess breakline points.
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| ARCBREAK | Replace arc segments in sets with points and arcs or chords.Replace all arcs in selected sets with additional segments by number of points, chords or an arc-to-chord tolerance.
The smoothness of the set is not changed so closed breaklines with dead smoothness still define dead areas for contours. The maximum arc-to-chord is reported to indicate whether sufficient points were created. See also GCARCBL which creates additional chords.
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| ARCENTRE | Toggle visibility of set arc centres.
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| AREA | Report the area inside plines or sets.Report the area and perimeter if closed and length if open.
The unit labelling is configured by UNITSSET. The message "Unable to get record's area" usually means that the figure crosses itself somewhere. If you cannot find where the set or pline crosses itself, you can get the area using GC10 and User Defined REPORTS such as Closure Report and Geometry Report. With GC10 and REPORTS the area inside the enclosed part is subtracted from the larger part, not added, and figures with spirals are not valid.
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| ARRANGE | Arrange icons of minimised views at the bottom left of the display.Arrange icons of minimised views at the bottom left of the display. Arrange is an ALIAS to MACROPLAY ARRANGEICONS which simulates the Arrange icons command in the Window menu.
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| ASAPIMAG | Add mastersheet images to plotboxes.Add to each plotbox the same images that are in the mastersheet. After you have used PLANSET to create plotboxes, place each logo image once in the mastersheet using IMAGE Manager then use ASAPIMAG to copy the logos in IMAGE Manager so they appear on each sheet. The plotboxes don't have to have been created by PLANSET, they just need to all be the same size and shape and all refer to the same plotbox (which PLANSET calls a "mastersheet"). See also ADDIMAGE.
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| ASHIN | Import an Ashtech points file
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| AUSGEOID | Import an AusGeoid DAT or TXT fileImport N-values as decimal latitude and longitude into the current layer. Use GCCOORD to convert to Easting Northing coordinates. Use GC54 to subtract the N-value from ellipse height points. For more information, go to Geoscience Australia. For AusGeoid in Coordinate System manager, see CSMAN.
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| AUTODRAFT | Create line, block and text features based on field codes.AutoDraft is described in the Field Data Module User Guide. See also BLKPTS, GCIMPORT, GCINSBLK, GCJOINMP, GCJOINPT, MAPPOINTS, MULTCODE, PTJOIN , PTLAYCOL and RELAYER.
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| AUTOSAVE | Enable automatic saving of project files.AutoSave automatically backs up the current project file at a user-specified time interval. Use this feature to protect your work from unexpected power failures or computer difficulties. The autosave file has the same title as your project file, but it has the *.SAV extension. The autosave file is saved in the folder you specify in the AutoSave Configuration dialog box. To use AutoSave:
AutoSave is a convenient safeguard for your work. If it does not automatically save your projects as you expect, see if you can determine the cause and resolve the issue yourself. Recommendations:
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| AUTOSET | Create a clockwise set joining points.See also QSET, GCTRACE, TRACEBDY and LOTJOIN.
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| AVGEND | Compute volumes by end-area given an alignment, Xlines and two dtm layersUse this command to compute volumes if you do not have the Site Design or Roadway modules. Create XLINES along an alignment first. Smaller intervals give more accurate volumes. Options
See also VOLUME to compute cut and fill volumes between surfaces, GRIDVOL, GCGRDVOL and GC20 to compute volumes between surfaces within multiple boundaries. GCGRDVOL can also report volumes within chainage ranges so it can give a similar report to AVGEND but with more accurate volumes. EARTHWRK, GCEARTH and XVOLUMES report volumes of roadways. If you get zero volumes when you expect sensible values, see FIXLAYERS.
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| BBEAR | Create a point at the intersection of two bearings or two lines.Select a point or line to indicate the starting and second point and bearings. If you select a point, enter a bearing to indicate the direction from the point. For each solution, BBEAR creates a new point at the intersection of the two bearings on the current layer.
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| BDIST | Create a point at the intersection of a line and an arc.Solve for the intersection of two arcs or distances, and create a point object at the intersection. Each arc is defined by a centre point and distance or by selecting an arc segment to define the centre point and distance.
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| BDYRELAY | Relayer within boundary and bandwidth.Relayer objects on layer list layers that are within a bandwidth of selected objects. See also GCOFLINE.
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| BEARTEXT | Add a datum angle to bearing text.Add a specified datum angle to the text value of selected text which includes values in degrees.
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| BENCH | Create a bench string.Create a bench string beside an existing set. There are settings for chainage range, batter slopes, whether to batter to DTM, datum or offsets, side, current layer, interval and corner tidying.
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| BFITCURV | Draw a curve of best fit through a series of selected points.Create a pline arc fitted through three or more points using the Least Squares method. Best-fit curve options:
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| BFITLINE | Create a line of best fit through a series of selected points.Creates a pline fitted through two or more points using the Least Squares computation method. Best-Fit Line Options
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| BGELEV | Create an elevation view of points.Copy selected points into an "Elevation" drawing in View 6. The position of the point along the selected Baseline determines the horizontal position in View 6, while the Z coordinate of the Point determines the vertical position in View 6. The points in View 6 are placed on the same layer that the points were originally placed on in the Plan View. The points in View 6 are given an alphanumeric identifier (point number). If the baseline has a Name, then this name and the original identifier are combined to create the identifier for the point in View 6. If the baseline does not have a name, a (2) is combined with the original identifier to create the identifier for the point in View 6. Max Alpha Points must be set in SYSTEM to a large enough number. See also FLIPUP.
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| BIN2IMG | Create a coloured image from depths.Create a coordinated image file of colours representing the elevation from hydrographic data created using HDMS.
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| BL | Create a breakline set.Create a set that is also a breakline. Create set between points that have elevations and are on the same layer as the first selected point. The set is created on the same layer. See also SET.
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| BLDG | Create a pline with right angles.Specify an origin, enter a bearing and distance then OK to enter the first wall segment. Then enter a positive distance to create a segment to the right, a negative distance for a segment to the left, New for a new building, Undo to undo the last segment or OK to complete the command. See also BUILDING, QSET, TRAVERSE.
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| BLFILTER | Filter excess points from breaklines.Replace sets on the selected layer with sets made up of straight segments within a filter "tube". This will usually reduce the number of vertices for sets containing straights and increase the vertices for arcs. The initial filter tube is of the specified length and orientated to the first segment on the set with width perpendicular to the segment and height measured vertically. You can limit by multiple boundaries. BLFILTER checks for additional vertices that are contained within the limits of the filter tube. Any vertices inside the tube are discarded. The first vertex Terramodel finds outside of the tube is kept, and the last discarded vertex inside the tube is added back to the set. The tube is then reoriented based on the last two vertices, and the process is repeated. Filtering is similar to FILTER command, except that BLFILTER also tests for elevation tolerance. SETFILT and GCFILTER filter by 2D offset tolerance instead. See also ARCBL which adds points and breaklines points into arcs and 3DFILTER which filters insignificant points from a DTM. .
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| BLINECHK | Check for crossing sets on a layer.Wherever sets on the selected layer cross, create a point with the name "bl-cross" on layer CROSSING and labelled with symbol 40 (circle). These points give an indication of crossing breaklines. Some points may be created at set segments which are not breaklines, such as arc segments or sets with points that are 2D, non-contourable or on different layers. Any previously created points on layer CROSSING will be deleted. As each set is checked against all the other sets, the count will appear slower at first then speed up. Use CROSSCHK to check all selected sets or plines.
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| BLKPTS | Place blocks at points based upon names in the BLOCK.MAP file.Replaced by AUTODRAFT or GCLABPNT for most purposes.
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| BLKREAD | Reread a blockReplace an internal block with a different external block with the same name. See also MKBLKINT.
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| BLOCK | Create, place, list or purge blocks.Combine objects into a single object that can be manipulated as a block. Blocks can consist of points, 3DFaces, plines, dynaviews, text and other blocks. Objects in blocks do not retain layer names. The block can be inserted multiple times into projects, shared between projects, scaled, rotated and otherwise edited. You can create both internal blocks (which can only be used within a single project file) and external blocks (which can be referenced by any Terramodel project file). If you specify an External block, Terramodel will use the first block with that name on the Terramodel Search Path. Points included in blocks lose point numbers. Sets are stored as plines when they are included in blocks. Blocks imported from DWG or DXF files can include 3DFaces. These become points and sets when the block is exploded in Terramodel. To create a block with 3DFaces of a Terramodel DTM, export that DTM surface as 3DFaces to DWG, block that layer in some CAD program then import as DWG into Terramodel.
Block Options
See also AUTODRAFT, BLKREAD, BLKPTS, DELBLKS, GCEXPLOD, GC09, GCINSBLK, HATCH, MKBLK, SCLBLKS, TEXT2PNT and UNITBLK.
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| BLOCKLST | Create a chart of blocks.Create an array of labelled blocks in the sheet view. The chart shows all blocks listed on separate lines in a text file called BLOCKSPT.LST. One way to create BLOCKSPT.LST is with Ztree using Ctrl-Batch and %4.The blocks must be internal blocks or external BLK files in the Search Path. You may wish to make the external blocks internal using MKBLKINT. A BLOCKSALL.PRO with matching BLOCKPTS.LST are installed in ..\Terramodel\Geocomp\Docs folder. DOCUMENTS includes links to BLOCKSALL.PRO and charts of the blocks in PDF files. A small block chart could be part of a legend. See also LINETYPS to create a chart of linetypes.
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| BOX | Draw a pline box.Draw a rectangular pline at specified opposite corners. See also POLYGON, PLOTBOX and PAD. If the box is to be used for a DYNAVIEW, we suggest that you adopt the convention of locating the first corner in the bottom left so that the insertion point of any rectangular dynaview can always be found at the bottom left.
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| BREAK | Break a pline or set into two parts.Break a pline or set into two parts at location. Select a pline or set, then a break location. The pline or set is broken into two parts at the location.
A polyline cannot be broken within a spiral or vertical curve. To break a pline or set by removing a segment, use DELETESEGMENT. In Terramodel prior to 10.5, BREAK deletes set segments like DELETESEGMENT does now.
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| BUILDING | Construct a building with perpendicular or angled sides.Construct a building with perpendicular or angled sides based on positive (right) and negative (left) offsets. Close the building by direct closure to the beginning point or close on a perpendicular to the beginning line. The beginning line can be cut or extended to match the closing line. See also BLDG, QSET and TRAVERSE.
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| CALLOUT | Label objects with predefined callout text.Create, edit, store and use predefined callout styles to label common features. Quickly label common point and line features, such as kerb inlets, without having to type the text each time. Stored callout styles define text in the label and may also define leader lines and text borders. Predefined the callout styles save time, look consistent and reduce typing errors. Callout styles are stored in multiple external .COS libraries in the ..\Terramodel\Locale\English and ...\Terramodel\Geocomp folders in categories. The loaded styles are recorded in tmodwin.ini and therefore independent of the project. The Geocomp Update loads the geocomp01.cos callout style library. Callout Options
See also GC21 which sets the active callout style and GCLABPNT which labels multiple points with EAT text.
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| CAROUSEL | Configure plotter carousels.Select and edit plotter pen carousel definitions. Each carousel defines the colour, in RGB, and width in mm, for "pens" to be used when plotting. Use PLOTSET, to map the object colour to a pen number and PLOTTERSET to assign the default carousel for each Plotter Configuraton. To copy a carousel, manually copy a pen carousel definition (PENDEF) within TMODWIN.INI.
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| CASCADE | Arrange all open views so that all the view names are visible.Arrange all open views so that all the view names are visible. Cascade is an ALIAS to MACROPLAY CASCADE which simulates the Cascade command in the Window menu.
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| CAT | Create a catenary.Create a segmented pline, between two attachment locations in the profile view, following the path of a cable suspended between two points. You can set the weight, tension and horizontal increment.
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| CDSPROF | Create an initial design profile for a cul-de-sac or kerb return.To create a kerb return,
The kerb return has four segments with vertical curves.
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| CENVIEW | Recentre views based on chainage.Tile the Plan, Profile, Super and Xsect views and centre by chainage from a selected roadjob alignment. Ideal for working along a long narrow alignment such as a road, rail or pipe. For any selected roadjob, nominate a chainage by selecting a location in the plan, profile, super or xsect views. The plan, profile and super views, if open, are recentred on the horizontal or vertical alignment at the selected chainage. The active chainage is set to the nearest cross section, and the Xsect view is fitted to the data. If the selected view is the Xsect, the active chainage is used, if set. The match button uses the centre of the active plan, profile or super view to recentre the other views. If the profile view is active, the plan and super views are scaled to fit the chainage range. There are buttons to zoom in or out by 25%, to fit data in all four views, and to move to the next or previous chainage then making it active. On starting this option, the views are horizontally tiled.
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| CF2SUPER | Compute superelevation from existing crossfall.For every point in a centreline set, compute the crossfall perpendicular to the HAL from the centreline to left and right edge-of-road sets. These crossfalls are placed in the Super view on the current layer so you can design to match existing superelevation. Xlines are ignored as these are not interpolated linearly.
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| CHAINAGE | Set the start chainage (or beginning station) of a HAL.If you selected US English during Terramodel installation, the command dialog and Settings menu will refer to Station. If British English, Chainage. Using ALIAS, STATION may be executed from the command line by CHAINAGE, STARTCHAINAGE and so on. Sets and plines are always chained from the first point created to the last point created. Chainage equations can be assigned by using HALMANAGER. See also ACTIVECHAINAGE, SETSTA, REVERSE and GC74.
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| CHEKROAD | Check and correct roadway alignment registration.See also GCSUBGDE and GCDTMGDE.
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| CHNGCOLR | Change colour bylayer to colour by colour number.For every selected object that has colour number = 0 (= BYLAYER), change the colour number to the colour of the layer. The displayed colour will not appear to change until you change the layer of the object or the colour in the layer settings. For example, select all objects by view to change to from a colour by layer convention to a colour by object convention. To change all from colour by object to colour by layer, COLOUR by view to colour 0.
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| CHNGHEIG | Change elevation by point nameChange the elevation of all selected points to match the numeric value of the name. All digits and the last decimal point in the name are considered; all other characters are ignored, for example:
You may need to tidy up the names with GC01, SNR or CHNGNAME first.
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| CHNGNAME | Replace characters in names based on a dictionary.Replace characters in names of selected records within a range according to a selected dictionary. Create a dictionary file using a text editor, following this example: #Dictionary file format # Lines with first char as # are ignored # use ' character as limiter #'Current Text','New Text' # #'English','Espanol' 'Feasibility Study','Estudio de factibilidad' 'Road design','D seño decarretera' 'North','Norte' 'Cross-Section','Corte' # #'English','Francais' 'CHAINAGE','PK' 'CH','PK' 'SCALES','ECHELLE' 'SCALE','ECHELLE' 'Scale','Echelle' 'LONGITUDINAL SECTION','Profil en Long' 'CROSS SECTIONS','Profil en Travers' 'OFFSET','Distance du centre' Note that the changes are processed in dictionary file order, so be careful. If, in the example, 'CH' replaced was before 'CHAINAGE', you would get 'PKAINAGE', not 'PK'. The name of a text object has the same value as the text, so use CHNGTEXT to change multiple text objects. Do not select text objects, if you do not want to change the text. See also SNR (Search and Replace), and CHTXT.
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| CHNGTEXT | Replace selected text based on a dictionary.Replace characters in selected text records according to a selected dictionary. Create a dictionary file using a text editor, following this example: #Dictionary file format # Lines with first char as # are ignored # use ' character as limiter #'Current Text','New Text' # #'English','Espanol' 'Feasibility Study','Estudio de factibilidad' 'Road design','D seño decarretera' 'North','Norte' 'Cross-Section','Corte' # #'English','Francais' 'CHAINAGE','PK' 'CH','PK' 'SCALES','ECHELLE' 'SCALE','ECHELLE' 'Scale','Echelle' 'LONGITUDINAL SECTION','Profil en Long' 'CROSS SECTIONS','Profil en Travers' 'OFFSET','Distance du centre' Note that the changes are processed in dictionary file order, so be careful. If, in the example, 'CH' replaced was before 'CHAINAGE', you would get 'PKAINAGE', not 'PK'. If the new text is a different length, you can match the text width attributes to suit. You can also refer to characters by their three-digit decimal ASCII value. For example, \010 for new line and \176 for degree (°) sign. What you see depends on the font. Not all fonts contain all characters. For example, in some fonts degree sign is \127. In fonts such as symbol.fnt, you can specify a symbol by this method. See also SNR (Search and Replace), CHNGNAME and CHTXT.
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| CHOSDIFF | Report chainage, offset and height difference from DTM.Report the Point Number, Chainage, Offset, Point Elevation, Design DTM Elevation, Elevation Difference and Name in a table, given a HAL, a Design DTM, and some points. If CSV, is selected, the report includes commas, so you can then save the report as a text file to CSV. No separate CSV file is created.
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| CHTXT | Convert stationing text to chainage text.Convert text objects representing distance along an alignment from USA stationing format, for example nn+nnn.nn, to UK/AUST chainage format, for example CH nnnnn.nn.
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| CIRCLE | Create a circular pline.Create a closed pline of four equal arcs centred on a specified location, with a specified radius.
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| CLEANSET | Remove unnecessary points from sets.Delete each point in selected sets with the same point number as the previous point. This also removes zero length arcs. Consecutive points can be created accidentally or exist in imported data. They may can cause some commands to behave in unexpected ways. See also DUPLTRIS.
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| CLEARMESS | Clear text from the the message scroll window.See also MESSAGESCROLL.
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| CLIP | Clip plines and sets to boundaries.Clip plines or sets where they cross selected closed boundaries. The objects can be clipped to remove that part Inside or Outside the boundaries, or to Break at the boundary. The boundaries can be closed plines or outside text objects. The clipping boundary of text objects is at the extent of the text scaled by the text clip margin defined in DRAFTSET. To clip a pline or set to boundaries, see TRIM or to a length, see GC88. To clip hatching, EXPLODE to plines first. To clip DTMs, see GCCLIP. To clip and merge DTMs, see DTMMATCH, GC33, GC33MULT or GCMERGE. To automatically clip contours, profiles and cross sections from dead areas, see SETSMOOTH. To clip Xlines, see GCXLINES. To clip a block to a dynaview, see BLOCK and SCLBLKS. To clip an image, see IMAGE. To clip subsurface lines in cross sections, see RDDESIGNSET.
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| CLOSE | Close the current project without exiting Terramodel.Close the current project file (.PRO) and the corresponding project lock (.PLK) file that was opened with the project.
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| CLOSEFIG | Close selected sets and plines.For selected sets and plines, create a segment from the end to the start. Optionally, use name masks from a file.
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| COLOR | Modify the color of selected objects.Change the color number of selected objects to a single specified color number in the range 0 to 255. Objects with color 0 are reported as having color BYLAYER, and are displayed in the point or line color of their layer. Blocks with Map Color flag turned ON are displayed in the color of the block. Blocks with Map Color flag turned OFF are displayed in the color of the objects in the block. Since Terramodel 10.40, with US English installation this command is spelled COLOR. To use COLOR with the British English installation, alias COLOR to the command COLOUR.
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| COLORCODE | Change the colour of points relative to the current roadway.Since the ranges are by 3D distances from the current roadway, this works best with approximately circular shapes such as those used in tunnels. Select points from those on a selected DTM layer. The Settings button allows you to assign colour numbers for use within distance ranges. Choose whether to change the colour of the existing points or create new points on a new layer with the desired colour at the same location. If you choose to create new points, you can set the elevations of the new points to the ("offsets" (difference in 3D distance) between the points and the current roadway. This can be modelled to create a difference DTM and determine the zero ("offsets" line. The 3D distances are interpolated from cross sections extracted at the specified interpolation spacing. Since Terramodel 10.40, with US English installation this command is spelled COLORCODE. To use COLORCODE with the British English installation, alias COLORCODE to the command COLOURCODE.
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| COLORCON | Change the colour of plines by contour interval.Increment the colour number of selected pline contours based on elevation. Change the colour of plines, with elevations, within each normal contour interval, to the next colour number. The colour numbers increment by 1 and repeat when the specified number of colours is reached. Examples:
The normal contour interval is set by CONTOURSET. If your contour interval is less than 1.0m, use the COLORCON installed with the Geocomp Update. COLOURCON is aliased to COLORCON. See also COLORPT.
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| COLORPT | Change the colour of points by contour interval.Increment the colour number of selected points based on elevation. Change the colour of points, with elevations, within each normal contour interval, to the next colour number. The colour numbers increment by 1 and repeat when the specified number of colours is reached. The normal contour interval is set by CONTOURSET. See also COLORCON and COLORCODE
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| COLOUR | Modify the colour of selected objects.Change the colour number of selected objects to a single specified colour number in the range 0 to 255. Objects with colour 0 are reported as having colour BYLAYER, and are displayed in the point or line colour of their layer. Blocks with Map Colour flag turned ON are displayed in the colour of the block. Blocks with Map Colour flag turned OFF are displayed in the colour of the objects in the block. Since Terramodel 10.40, with British English installation this command is spelled COLOUR. To use COLOUR with the US English installation, alias COLOUR to the command COLOR.
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| COLOURCODE | Change the colour of points relative to the current roadway.Since the ranges are by 3D distances from the current roadway, this works best with approximately circular shapes such as those used in tunnels. Select points from those on a selected DTM layer. The Settings button allows you to assign colour numbers for use within distance ranges. Choose whether to change the colour of the existing points or create new points on a new layer with the desired colour at the same location. If you choose to create new points, you can set the elevations of the new points to the ("offsets" (difference in 3D distance) between the points and the current roadway. This can be modelled to create a difference DTM and determine the zero ("offsets" line. The 3D distances are interpolated from cross sections extracted at the specified interpolation spacing. Since Terramodel 10.40, with British English installation this command is spelled COLOURCODE. To use COLOURCODE with the US English installation, alias COLOURCODE to the command COLORCODE.
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| COLRLINE | Modify the colour and linetype of selected objects by layer.Modify the colour and linetype of selected objects according the layer of the object and a mapping file. The file format is layer,colour,linetype See geocomp.lcl for an example. COLORLINE and COLOURLINE are aliased to COLRLINE. See also GC16 and GC16ADC.
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| COMMAND | Command line.Open a new command line. Open a new command line so that a command can be entered from the keyboard while another command is still active. To start a new command line, select Command from the File menu or press Ctrl+Shift+C. If you open a new command line while you are still in a command, when this command is complete, control is returned to the previous command. If the command line has disappeared, see CommandToggle.
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| CommandToggle | Toggle on or off the visibility of the command line.Toggle an invisible command line on, select Command line from the Window menu. The command line toggle only controls visibility, unlike COMMAND in the File menu which opens a new command line on top of the current command. CommandToggle is an ALIAS to MACROPLAY COMMANDTOGGLE which simulates the Command line command in the Window menu.
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| COMPASS | Place a hydrographic compass rose.Place hydrographic compass rose blocks with optional magnetic deviation and date of survey. Requires comp-tn.blk and comp-mn.blk which are supplied with the TML.
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| CONNECT | Connect two lines of the same type, forming a single line.Similar to JOIN, except that if the lines do not have to have coincidental end points a connecting line segment is added. The resulting line will retain the record number of the first line selected, and all of its properties and attributes. Any objects that previously referenced either the first or second line will thereafter reference the resulting line. In selecting the lines you can pick anywhere on the line. However, you must pick nearest the end that you wish to be connected to the other line.
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| CONTOUR | Extract pline contours from a DTM.Create plines interpolated from a DTM at elevation intervals. The intervals, labelling, linetypes and layers are controlled by CONTOURSET.
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| ContourAtElev | Create plines at a specified contour elevation.Create contour plines everywhere a specified elevation intersects a specified DTM layer. The labelling and minimum length are controlled by CONTOURSET.
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| CONTOURSET | Configure contour settings.Set the contour values uses by commands such as CONTOUR, LINKSET, COLORPT and COLORCON.
See also CONTOURATELEV.
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| CONTOURVOL | Compute volumes from contour plines.Computes volumes for individual mounds or depressions based on contour plines. The volumes are obtained by using the average-end-area method, where the area of a closed contour is determined, then averaged with an adjacent contour, and multiplied by the contour interval to obtain an incremental volume. Incremental volumes are then added together to obtain a total volume. This method is less accurate than that of the EARTHWORK command, but can provide an alternative approximation of mound and depression volumes. You can use the ContourVol command in two different modes:
The selected contours must be closed, assigned an elevation, and form a continuously rising mound or a continuously falling depression. If the contours are open due to labels, use GCMATCH to create plines across the gaps, then JOIN the contours.
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| CONVERT | Convert sets to plines or plines to sets.Any combination of sets and plines can be converted to a single type of object. New lines are assigned the colour and linetype of the original line and placed on the layer of the original. Names, start chainage and other attributes are not retained. You have the choice of keeping or deleting the original objects. Convert Options
Tips on using Convert
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| CONVSET | Set slope convention.Define the slope convention (ratio preference) according your local practice. Choose either Horizontal run: vertical rise (e.g. 4:1) or Vertical rise: horizontal run (e.g. 1:4). These conventions can be overridden by Terramodel settings or report formats. Even within the one project, the convention may vary, so check in each case.
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| COORDCON | Coordinate transformation of points.Use either seven-parameter transformation, or where possible, the faster and more accurate NTv2 distortion grid method. The principles and operation are described in detail in Terramodel 10 User's Guide Chapter 13: Using Coordcon. See also our Nav notes for more background and examples of how to create, set up and use coordinate systems. COORDCON may be aliased to GCCOORD which transforms not just points, but sets, plines and text. GCCOORD also adds Australian and New Zealand Coordinate Systems. GCLLGRID draws Latitude and Longitude grids and labels using COORDCON settings. GeoCalc transforms files of points, whereas COORDCON transforms points in Terramodel projects. Both COORDCON and GCCOORD use the same COORDSYS, DATUMS and ELIPSOID data files in the \Shared\Mentor.dir. COORDCON requires COGO module. If you are converting between foot and metre coordinate systems, use MEASUNIT to set the project metric conversion factor for International foot (0.3048) or US Survey foot (0.304800609601). CSMAN and GEOSYS are part of a completely separate Coordinate System Manager for Trimble devices only.
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| COORDS | Toggle and configure the Coordinate Scroll display dialog.Coordinate Scroll tracks the cursor. The data displayed varies depending on the current command, the current control type (locate, bearing, distance, offset, station, point, etc.) and the active view mode (plan, profile, sheet, cross section, etc.). Coordinate Scroll Options
Coordinate Scroll tips:
Coordinate Scroll TMODWIN.INI settings:
If you have multiple displays, Terramodel, and the coordinate scroll if visible, will always open on the primary display, but it is possible to lose the scroll of the edge of the display. If you lose the scroll, check that you have turned it on. If you can't find it, type RECOVERSCROLL. See also GC75, IDSTATION and GCDTMDIF.
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| COPY | Copy selected objects to a new location or layer.Duplicate selected objects.
Tips
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| COPYROAD | Copy a roadjob to a new roadjob.Copy a roadjob to a new roadjob retaining all roadways, registered alignments and phases. This allows you to quickly recompute a new design without having to reenter all the values or lose the old design. The Settings allow you to choose whether to copy surfaces, design templates, subgrade templates, skips, superelevations, design settings or mass haul information.
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| COPYRWAY | Copy one roadjob into a different roadjob.Copy all roadways from one road job to a different roadjob. This allows you to merge two road jobs. To copy some roadways, copy the whole roadjob then delete the roadways you don't want. The Settings allow you to choose whether to copy surfaces, design templates, subgrade templates or superelevations.
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| COPYTEMP | Copy a roadway template to other templates with the same name.Update all design or subgrade templates in a roadway which have the same template name by copying the design of a nominated template. This saves having to repeat the same edits to multiple templates with the same template name or repeatedly use the Copy button in TMANAGER.
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| CORDSCRL | Recover a lost coordinate scroll dialog.If you cannot find the coordinate scroll dialog, even though you have used COORDS to confirm that it is turned on, you may have moved the dialog off the windows display. Type CORDSCRL, or RECOVERSCROLL (an alias for CORDSCRL) to recover the scroll. The coordinate scroll should then appear next time you start Terramodel located approximately 600 pixels down and across from the top left corner of the Terramodel display. You can then move the scroll to where you prefer. If you have multiple displays, Terramodel, and the coordinate scroll if visible, will always open on the primary display.
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| COUNT | Count the number of objects of each type in each view.An alias to OLIST. See also LAYINFO, DTMINFO, OLIST2 and LIST.
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| CRDTABLE | Create a coordinate table of points.
The points are now sorted into integer points in point number order followed by alpha points in alphabetical order. See also LLTABLE and LABELTABLE.
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| CREATELL | Import layers and layer lists from a file.Import lists of layers in layer lists. The format of the input file is layer_list,layer_name,line_colour,point_colour,linetype. Only the layer list and layer name are required. You have the option to create new layers where named layers do not already exist. Colours and linetypes are only applied to new layers. Use LLISTSET to check that the layer lists have been created correctly. Use LLRPT to export a file suitable for use with CREATELL.
|
CROSSCHK | Check for crossing sets or plines.Wherever selected sets or plines cross, create a point with the name "bl-cross" on layer CROSSING and labelled with symbol 40 (circle). Any previously created points on layer CROSSING will be deleted. You could, for example, use CROSSCHK look for crossing lines in a window on an isolated layer. Use BLINECHK to check sets on a selected layer.
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| CROWFOOT | Toggle on/off arrowheads (crowfeet) from leader lines.Select a segment label text object and toggle its configuration to either display or not display the crow's feet leader lines that point to the label from the end of the line segment. If the label is a user-mode label, toggling crowfeet off will restore the normal leader line established by this command's settings.
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| CSMAN | Coordinate System Manager.Manage coordinate systems used by Trimble devices. Coordinate System Manager manages the current.csd database in C:\Program Files\Common Files\Trimble\GeoData\ or C:\Program Files (x86)\Common Files\Trimble\GeoData\. You can also open Coordinate System Manager through directly through Windows Start... Programs.. Trimble Office... Utilities... Coordinate System Manager. Coordinate System Manager is supplied with a number of Trimble surveying and mapping systems. It lets Trimble surveying instrument users:
Use Coordinate System Manager to:
To add a new Geoid Grid File to Coordinate System Manager using AusGeoid09 as an example
CSMAN executes C:\Program Files (x86)\Common Files\Trimble\Geodb\Geodbnt.exe in 64 bit Windows. Use or rename the alias CSMAN2000, CSMAN32, CSMAN95, CSMAN98, CSMANME, CSMANNT or CSMANXP if required. See also GEOSYS. COORDCON and GCCOORD are completely separate from the Coordinate System Manager.
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| CSTAKE | Create custom construction staking reports.You can create roadway staking format files which allow you to control the format and content of roadway staking reports. Open the Construction Staking command bar.
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| CULDESAC | Create a cul-de-sac at the end of a pline or set.
See Terramodel help for diagrams illustrating the four cul-de-sac types.
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| CURSOR | Limit the direction and increment of cursor movement
You can also change the Snap Settings using SNAPSET.
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| CURVE | Insert or edit a pline curve.Insert an arc, spiral, vertical, combining or overhauser curve into a pline. Select the type of curve to be inserted and the IP (also known as control point, vertex or Intersection Point) by clicking on or typing in the pline:cp. After you select the curve type and vertex, click OK to select the curve properties.
You can also enter curves while entering alignments using the PLINE, SEGEDIT and HALDATA commands.
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| CURVESOL | Compute curves from arc properties.Calculate and report the properties of an arc given two arc properties. No objects are created.
Curve parameters are reported to the precision established in UNITSSET.
See also CURVE, SCURVE and FILLET.
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| CUTFILL | Balance cut and fill volumes (metric).Raise or lower the design DTM automatically until the desired net volume to an existing DTM is reached. Compute batters according to the design slopes of the DTM edge sets. If there are no sets on the design layer, plines on that layer can be converted to sets. Optionally, use Shrink/Swell factors. Distances are in metres and volumes are in cubic metres. See also CUTFILLA, PADSHIFT and MOVEPAD.
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| CUTFILLA | Balance cut and fill volumes (feet).Raise or lower the design DTM automatically until the desired net volume to an existing DTM is reached. Batters according to the design slopes of the DTM edge sets. Optionally, use Shrink/Swell factors. Distances are in feet and volumes are in cubic yards. See also CUTFILL, PADSHIFT and MOVEPAD.
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| CVD5EXPT | Export data to Civilcad ASCII5 5 (AS5).Export point, sets and text to Civilcad AS5 file format. Civilcad AS5 files are compatible with Civilcad versions 5 and 6 but not 4.
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| CVD5IMPT | Import data from Civilcad AS5 file.Import data in Civilcad ASCII 5 (.AS5) file format. Civilcad AS5 files are compatible with Civilcad versions 5 and 6 but not 4. The point numbers are retained, with the option of adding a constant. Strings on a layer with common points are joined into sets. As5 files can contain zero length arcs. This can result in extra circles if exported to DXF or DWG. If this happens, use CLEANSET to remove the zero length arcs.
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| CVDEXPT | Export data to Civilcad Version 4 ASC.Export pints, sets and text to Civilcad ASC file format. Civilcad ASCII 4 (ASC) files are compatible with Civilcad versions 4 and 5 but not 6.
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| CVDIMPT | Import data from Civilcad Version 4 ASC.Import data in Civilcad ASC file format. Civilcad ASCII 4 (ASC) files are compatible with Civilcad versions 4 and 5 but not 6. Include points, strings and text. Layer names are retained and codes are imported as names. Non-contourable points in the ASC file are not included in Terramodel DTMs. EDIT and GC53 toggles this attribute. Strings on a layer with common points are joined into sets.
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| DCEDIT | DC File EditorView or edit Trimble .DC files and Sokkia .SDR files. You can also run the DC File Editor directly from Start... Programs... Trimble Office... Utilities... DC File Editor. If you have a 32-bit version of Windows, type DCEDIT32 in the command line instead.
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| DDIST | Create a point at the intersection of two distances or arcs.Solve for the intersection of two arcs or distances, and create a point object at the intersection. DDIST uses two command bars that define the information required for the two distances (arcs) to be intersected. Each arc is defined by a centre point and distance or by selecting an arc segment to define the centre point and distance.
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| DEFANG | Determine the angle between two bearings.The angle is displayed in the message area for cutting and pasting into an angle control.
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| DELBLKS | Delete missing external blocks.Delete all external blocks from the project where the external .BLK file is missing. "Unable to find block" messages are often due to importing a DWG or DXF file containing links to missing external blocks. If you still have "unable to find block" messages after running DELBLK, you probably have blocks that contain other blocks that are missing. You will need to EXPLODE these blocks then run DELBLKS again. See also BLOCK List and BLOCK Purge.
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| DELETE | Delete selected objects from a project.Delete selected objects from a project. You can prevent objects from being selected for deletion by Type with Search Settings and by Layer with LAYERSET. Once you Delete the objects, it may be necessary to REDRAW your screen to view the changes. If you Delete all of the points defining a set, the set is also deleted. If you have checked "Protect Pn in Use From Deletion" in Point Settings your points will remain intact if you have selected the points for deletion but not the attached set. See also DeleteSegment.
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| DELETESEGMENT | Delete a selected segment from a set or pline.Click on each segment in turn that you want to delete then click Close to close the command without deleting any other segments. See also DELETE to delete the whole record, BREAK to break the segment at a location, HIDE to make set segments invisible and SEGEDIT to edit using a table of segments. In Terramodel prior to 10.5, BREAK deleted set segments like DELETESEGMENT does now.
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| DESC | Change numeric names to alphanumeric descriptors.Change numeric names to alphanumeric names using a user-defined descriptor mapping file (.pco) See also CHNGNAME, IMPORT, DESC, GRP2NAME and LAY2NAME.
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| DESCAD | Change numeric names (point descriptors) to alphanumeric descriptors using a multi-code separator and global code identifier.Uses a user-defined descriptor mapping file (.pco) See also IMPORT, DESC, GRP2NAME and LAY2NAME.
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| DESIGN | Project batters from a design DTM to another DTM.Before using the Design command, make sure the entire design DTM layer is enclosed with one or more contiguous sets (such as a created by DTMEDGE). Check or configure the slope attributes of each surrounding set with the Slopes option of EDIT. The grade is applied in 3D from the set. This is different to simply grading to an offset and elevation. If the set has a steep longitudinal grade, the difference will be noticeable. Whenever the Design command encounters an arc on the outside edge of the design DTM, it uses the Segments Per Arc setting of DISPLAYSET to break the curve into straight line segments. Points are created at these segments (along the curve) and are then projected to intersect with original ground. Set lines are created to connect the design curve points and the ground intersection points. Ground intersection points, points along arcs, and sets that Terramodel creates are assigned the name of the design layer as their name. You can easily erase these points by selecting them by name. (Name selection is case sensitive.) See also DESIGNSET, CUTFILL, MOVEPAD and SIDESLOPE>.
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| DESIGNELEV | Modify elevation to design roadway elevation.Modify the elevation of existing points so that they lie on the design surface of a designated road job. Terramodel projects a perpendicular intersection from a location to the HAL to determine the chainage along the HAL and the offset from the HAL. The elevation of the point is interpolated by cutting a slice through the design surface at the station and offset.
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| DESIGNSET | Configure design settingsConfigure the default batter slopes and smoothness assigned to new sets and vertical sight distance calculation parameters. These settings are stored with the project file.
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| DESPIKE | Remove spikes from a DTM.Based on maximum grade and a boundary.
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| DFEDIT | Data Format EditorEdit logger (.lgr) files which contain the detailed data format used by the IMPORT and EXPORT script managers to interpret the data. This editor uses DataFormatEditor.dll. If you have 32-bit Windows, type DFEDIT32 instead.
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| DIAG | Trimble diagnostic reportReport details of the computer relevant to Trimble applications including system architecture, Windows registry, Trimble applications and files. If TrimRptU.exe does not run, install Trimble Data Transfer Utility and try again. If you have 32-bit Windows, use or rename alias DIAG32.
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| DIM | Label dimension between two points or a segment of set or pline.You can dimension between two points or along a segment with text placed at a location. Click Props to configure the labelling units, decimal places, and layer on which the labels will be placed.
When the dimension is created in a view with a vertical exaggeration, the dimension text will appear distorted if the view exaggeration changes.
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| DISJOIN | Break sets and plines into segments.This is different to EXPLODE, which explodes only sets and plines with complex linetypes. DISJOIN does not break plines containing curves. DISJOIN is an alias of GCUNJOIN. See also JOIN.
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| DISPFEAT | Display feature attributes.Label selected records with any attributes defined by features.adf. Specify a layer and text style to label the records with EAT text or Report the attributes without creating the labels. Requires the general-purpose attribute definition file FEATURES.ADF.
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| DISPLAYSET | Control how objects are displayed.Allows some objects to be partially displayed for quicker display redraw times. Controls the number of pixels used to display points. The view resolution segments per arc, spline, spiral and vertical curve controls not only the resolution on the display but also profile extraction from a DTM and similar functions. For any curve, the maximum number of segments for all the components of a curve together is 100 otherwise the curve will not display correctly. For example, if arcs have 20 segments and spirals have 10, the total for Arc curves would be 10+20+10=40, and the total for Combining curves would be 10+20+10+20+10=70. PLOTSET maintains an independent plotting resolution that enables you to plot curves to the plotter more smoothly than is generally required for display.
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| DISTANCE | Display the distance between two locations.Display the 2D distance between two locations defined by coordinates in From and To point controls. The distance is displayed in the message scroll in both project units, and in sheet units at the view scale. You have the option to also display the accumulative length which can be reset. The locations can be limited by object snaps. See also GC29 for 3D distances between points and along segments and these commands that report distances: GC29UTM, REPORTS , GEOMINQ, GC3DSETS, GC75, GC81, LABELSEG, GCDIMLOT and GEOMRPTS.
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| DIVIDE | Divide a line into intervals.Create points along a set or pline at intervals. You specify the number of segments, whether to divide one segment or an entire line, whether the points are moved to round number chainages, and whether to insert the points into sets. See also 3D, GC28, PREDAREA, GC04, INTOSET and GC68.
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| DLGDOOUT | Export a USGS DLG (optional format) file.Export a United States Geological Survey Digital Line Graph-Optional format lines with elevations. See Terramodel help for details.
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| DLGDOIN | Import a USGS DLG (optional format) fileImport a United States Geological Survey Digital Line Graph-Optional format lines with elevations. See Terramodel help for details.
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| DLGDOOUT | Write a DLG (optional format) file.
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| DLINE | Dimension between two locations.Draw pline segments between locations and label the segments with text showing the length in metres to the specified number of decimal places.
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| DOCUMENTS | List Terramodel documents.List user guides, tutorials, manuals, charts, table, classes, notes, lists and help files installed with Terrmodel Geocomp Update. The associated sample data sets are installed into C:\Program files\Trimble\Terramodel\Geocomp\Docs or C:\Program files (x86)\Trimble\Terramodel\Geocomp\Docs.
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| DRAFTSET | Drafting settings.Configure the text spacing, text offset distance, and other general drafting settings for the project.
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| DRAPE | Create sets with 3D points where selected plines cross DTM links.If there is no grade change at the link crossing, no point is created.
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| DRAGHDIN | Import Drag Head log file.
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| DRAINRPT | Report drainage details to a CSV file.Select drain sets and specify a lid layer.
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| DRILL01 | Label a drill hole.Label a drill hole with some properties of the collar point and drill hole. The text label includes the name and coordinates of the collar point and the bearing and dip of the drill hole segment at the specified text location. The Settings button controls the text style. The collar point does not have to be an end point of the drill hole segment.
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| DRNGRADE | Label segment with grade and direction.The grade is written parallel to the segment in two formats. A pline of leaderline linetype showing direction is drawn between the text and the segment. See also LABGRADE .
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| DTM2LDBX | Export DTM layer to Leica 1200 DBX database files.Export a DTM layer within a boundary to an XML file and convert to Leica 1200 DBX database using RoadRunnerAddOn. The database files can be used with Road Runner or DigSmart3D on Leica 1200 instruments. The XML file can also be imported into UMC_3D for PowerGrade3D. See also DTM2XML , ROAD_RUN, GCPTSOUT , GCMULXML, POWERGDE and PLAN2DBX .
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| DTM2XML | Export DTM layer to LandXML triangles.DTM2XML excludes triangles inside dead areas. See also DTM2LDBX , VRMLOUT and EXPORT LandXML script.
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
DTMALL
![]() |
Relink all DTM layers and redraw the display.See also GCDTMALL which also creates arc breaklines, TOGLINKS which turns on and off link visibility without relinking and DTMUPDT which updates only the current DTM layer.
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| DTMAREA | Report planimetric and surface areas of a DTM within slope ranges.Report planimetric and surface areas of a DTM within slope ranges to the P3Pad report editor. The slope ranges for which areas are to be reported are defined in the [Slope Table] section of the TMODWIN.INI file. This table can be manually edited to configure a maximum of 100 slope ranges (by default 16). To set the number of slope ranges, edit the TableSize=# variable. The lines in tmodwin.ini following TableSize define each slope range with boundaries defined by decreasing percentage slope. The default layer is the current DTM layer. To set the current DTM layer, see DTMCH. See also SLOPE, GC44 and GC82.
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| DTMCH | Change the current DTM layer.The current DTM layer is displayed in the Coordinate scroll box with the elevation, aspect and slope at the cursor. To relink the current DTM layer only, use DTMUPDT. The current DTM layer is not necessarily the current layer.
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| DTMCONE | Project a cone onto a DTM.Given an x, y location, interpolate the height from a DTM and create a 3D point on the current layer a specified elevation difference above. Then, in horizontal directions 5° apart, project from this point at the nominated vertical angle until the DTM surface is reached. Create a pline or set in the current layer joining the points. If a set, lines from the central point are added to help in DTM formation.
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| DTMEDGE | Create a set around a DTM edge.The set is on the DTM layer in the current colour. The current link settings determine the extent of the DTM. The DTM edge set locks the extent of the DTM, even against changes in link settings. Multiple contiguous sets around a DTM will still function as a DTM edge, but allow DESIGN and MOVEPAD to use variable batters. You can edit a DTM edge set using BREAK, SET and so on. If there are any 3D points on the layer outside the DTM edge set, the DTM edge is invalid. GC22 checks for and fixes this.
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| DTMGRID | Interpolate a grid over a DTM.Specify origin, bearing, intervals and boundary. See also GCGENGRD, GRIDELEV, GRIDEXPT, GRIDMAKE, GRDPTS and TRMBGRID.
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| DTMINFO | List DTM information by layer for selected points.List by layer, for the selected points, the Layer name, View names, number of records, number of points, number of 3D Points, number of 3D points not in DTM and the maximum and minimum Easting, Northing and Elevation. The totals are summed and the ranges also computed for all the selected points. The DTM status shows which layers have been linked and whether they are part of a Multilayer DTM. The selected DTM layers relinked. If you want a report of duplicate points, run GC92 first. See also LAYINFO, OLIST and LIST.
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| DTMMATCH | Match overlapping DTMs at a match line.This process is typically required two merge two DTMs created by photogrammetry. By matching the DTM layers, contour lines will match perfectly at the user specified match line. Alternatively the contour lines can be relayered and joined using JOIN. See also GCMATCH which matches contours only and GCMERGE which merges multiple DTMs.
Tips on using DTMMATCH command
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| DTMMATH | Create points by comparison with two DTMs.Create new points on a third layer with elevations determined by a user-defined mathematical formula which may include the elevations of the first and second specified DTMs. In the Settings, specify the formula, whether to use the points from the first or second layers, or both and whether to report the results. See also GC70.
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| DTMPTS | Interpolate elevations of points from a DTM.Assign elevations to 2D points from a DTM surface. Points outside the limits of the DTM are not assigned elevations. Only 2D points are be modified. To modify 3D points, first use GCNOELEV or ELEVATION (Absolute) to make the points 2D by giving them an absolute elevation of *. See also ELEVOBJS which replaces elevations of point, text and blocks interpolated from a DTM. See also GC70 which replaces elevations of both 2D and 3D points, and can also combine the point elevations with the DTM elevations. See also GCPTSTXT which interpolates elevations from nearby text instead of a DTM. See also DTMGRID, GRIDELEV, GC50, INT3DSET and ELVPLINE.
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| DTMSET | Create sets from DTM links.Triangles sides are links on a DTM layer. Specify the new DTM layer, whether to copy points to the new layer (or just the sets) and whether to create complete triangles (or just the links). If these sets are used as breaklines in another DTM application, the resulting DTM will be similar. Links inside dead areas are omitted. If you are exporting to an application that prefers DXF or DWG 3DFaces, use the AutoCAD Export script instead. See also GCDTMOUT, GSIDTMOU, QSGRIDOU, KORKDTM and TRMBTIN.
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| DTMSHOT | Create a point on a DTM at a grade and bearing.Create a point at the intersection of a theoretical 3D line and a DTM. Specify a DTM layer, a start point, a bearing and a vertical angle. The start point cannot be at the same elevation as the DTM. The bearing and vertical angle units are controlled by UNITSSET.
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| DTMSTATS | Display the highest and lowest elevations of a point in a layer.Also lists the point numbers, the elevation difference and the average elevation. The highest and lowest points are marked with temporary circles; the bigger circles mark the higher point. The markers disappear on refresh. Includes all points on the layer including non-contourable points. See also RANGE and EVALDTM.
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| DTMUPDT | Relink the current DTM layer and refresh.Use DTMCH to change the current DTM layer first. GCARCBL creates breaklines around arcs, DTMALL relinks all layers and GCDTMALL does both.
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| DUMPATT | Report the attribute records stored for a selected object.
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| DUPLTRIS | Remove duplicated segments from triangular sets.Remove segments from triangular sets which join the same points as a segment on another set. Use DUPLTRIS to reduce the number of points and segments in an imported DTM. To create a DTM surface with the same shape as the original used to create the triangles, create all triangle sides. To allow the DTM to be reformed without flat triangles, only create the sets along the shortest triangle sides and enable "Remove flat triangles" in LINKSET. Any point in a set with the same number as the previous point is removed. See also CLEANSET. To simplify the shape of a DTM surface, see 3DFILTER.
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| DXFCHANG | Relayer all layers in a DXF file according to a map file.Relayer all layers in a DXF file according to a file which maps unique sequential numbers to layer names. To export object names longer than 16 characters to AutoCAD or similar via DXF into layers:
For object names up to 16 characters you could use NAME2LAY instead.
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| DYNAVIEW | Create dynaviews.Use a dynaview to display a portion of a view in another location. For instance, you can create one dynaview around a part of the plan view, create a second dynaview around the same part in profile view, and combine these into a plan and profile sheet in sheet view. You can also create a enlarged view of a detailed area. The advantage of a dynaview it that it is a dynamic view of the design, not just a copy. This saves memory, eliminates transposition errors and, when the design is updated, the dynaview is updated automatically.
See also PLANSET, MIRRORDY, FIXDYNA, MVIEW, SCLPLOTB, DISPLAYSET, LLIST and SCLBLKS.
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| EARTHWORK | Compute cut and fill volumes between two DTMs.
Tips on using EARTHWORK command.
See also XVOLUMES. EARTHWORK command was previously known as VOLUME.
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| EARTHWRK | Create an earthwork report.See also GCEARTH and XVOLUMES.
If you get zero volumes when you expect sensible values, see FIXLAYERS.
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| EDIT | Edit any object.Edit these properties of any object according to object type.
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| ELE2NAME | Change the name of selected points and plines to match the elevation.Change the name of selected points and plines to match the elevation. If the current name is not blank, you can overwrite, prefix or suffix.
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| ELEVALONGSET | Modify the elevation of points along a set using a vertical angleModify the elevation of selected points within a particular set based on their position along the set with respect to a 3D reference point in that set, and a vertical angle. If the specified vertical angle is other than a vertical distance, Terramodel multiplies the implied slope by the horizontal distance between the points along the set's alignment, and adds the resulting change in elevation to the elevation of the reference point to compute the elevation of the selected point.
This command is similar to ELEVREFPT, except that the distance between the selected point and the reference point is determined along the horizontal alignment of a set within which they are both members. See also ELEVREFPLANE.
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| ELEVATION | Modify the elevation of selected objects.Modify the elevation of selected objects to an absolute elevation or relative to the current elevation of the object. Use the radio buttons to select Absolute or Relative. Turn 3D points into 2D points by entering an asterisk (*) as the elevation. One way to balance earthwork is to repeatedly change the relative elevation of the design DTM by layer then repeat to project new sideslopes. See also GCELEV which has a clearer dialog. See also GC69 , GC53, GCNOELEV and CUTFILL.
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| ELEVOBJS | Interpolate elevation of points, text and blocks from a DTM.Replace the elevation of selected points, text and blocks by interpolating from the DTM.
See also DTMPTS which only adds elevations on 2D points and GCPTSTXT which takes the elevation from the value of the nearest text object.
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| ELEVREFPLANE | Modify the elevation of points along a set using a vertical angleModify the elevation of selected points by projecting them vertically to an imaginary plane surface. The plane surface is defined with respect to a 3D reference point by specifying a bearing, and a vertical angle. The vertical angle is applied in the direction of the indicated bearing, establishing the tilt of the plane surface, which passes through the reference point.
See also ELEVREFPT.
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| ELEVREFPT | Modify the elevation of points along a set using a vertical angleModify the elevation of selected points based on their horizontal distance from a 3D reference point and a vertical angle relationship. If the specified vertical angle is other than a vertical distance, the implied slope will be multiplied by the distance between the points, and the resulting change in elevation will be added to the elevation of the reference point to compute the elevation of the selected point. If the specified vertical angle is entered as a vertical distance, it will simply be added to the elevation of the reference point to get the elevation of the selected points.
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| ELFS | Show elevation and grade of a profile at a chainage.The chainage can be keyed-in or selected graphically in the profile view.
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| ELLIPSE | Create an ellipse.Select a pline segment for the major axis, the width of the minor axis and the number of segments in the pline.
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| ELTXT | Create points at the insertion point of selected text with elevations from the text.Create point entities using the insertion point of the text for the coordinates of the point. The text string is the source of the elevation assigned to the point. See also TEXT2PT for one point at a time and TEXT2PNT which also does blocks. This feature can be used to convert points on 2D plans, where the elevations are presented as text labels, to 3D. Since the insertion point of the text will not usually match the point that the text refers to, some bulk shifting or editing may be required.
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| ELVPLINE | Change the elevation of selected plines based on the average elevation of each vertex of the pline on a specified DTM layer.The elevation is rounded to the nearest interval in the current CONTOURSET command settings. Use this to convert 2D plines to contours when you have the DTM.
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| EMXSALIGN | Import a GeoPak alignment reportRead a specific GeoPak alignment file format. See also RDSCACALN and RDSGPALIGN.
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| ERR_ELIP | Define error ellipse attributesDefine attributes on selected points derived from any error ellipse blocks attached to the points. These points can then be labelled with attributes using EAT TEXT. RDE can create elliptical blocks indicating the possible error by least squares. These blocks are circles which are scaled by the errors in x and y, then scaled again by 1000 so they are readily visible, then rotated. Requires the attribute definition file ERR_ELIP.ADF.
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| EVALDTM | Evaluate a DTMReport potential problems with DTM breakline formation. For each breakline set on the layer, report which segments and points are not used. Every straight set segment which connects to two 3D, contourable points on the same DTM layer is a breakline.
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| EXEC | Execute an external programUse arguments to specify the external program and pass variables. This is often used with ALIAS. See also RUN.
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| EXIT | Exit TerramodelSave recent changes to objects, close the current project and exit Terramodel. If you have made changes to objects since the last save, you will be prompted to save changes. If you have changed project variables only, save changes before exiting. When you save changes, records are renumbered to remove any gaps in the sequence of record numbers caused by by deleting objects. See also RUN.
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| EXPLODE | Explode blocks, text and complex linetypesExplode selected blocks into component parts, and text and complex linetypes into plines. Optionally, delete the old objects. The exploded components are created on the current layer only. Use GCEXPLOD instead to explode to the same layer as the block while and retain the elevations and names. Blocks are exploded into the component plines, text and blocks. Because blocks can be nested inside blocks, you may need to explode more blocks. Text containing EAT codes is exploded into ordinary text. Ordinary text is exploded into plines. Text linked to points, such as dimensions, loses those links. Sets and plines with complex linetypes are exploded into plines and symbol text. Solid lines are unaffected. If you want to separate a line into segments, use DISJOIN instead. To select or restrict by Type, such as blocks but not text, use SEARCH settings or Right mouse button Type.
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
EXPLORE
![]() |
Open Windows Explorer.Open Windows Explorer file manager. Windows Explorer is also known as Explore, My Computer and Computer.
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| EXPORT | Export data using scripts.Using a system of programmable scripts, export to a wide range of file formats. The formats include various data collectors and survey instruments, ASCII, AutoCAD (dwg and .dxf), TDS, Carlson, LandXML, Microstation DGN and Terramodel PRO. You can also upload the file to some survey instruments. The Export Script Manager EXPORTSMGR controls the scripts, including which scripts are listed on the menu. See also IMPORT and DFEDIT.
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| EXPORTGC | Export or report cross sections in Geocomp format.Given a road job surface, create a Geocomp .CES cross section file or a detailed cross section report similar to that produced by Geocomp RDP 482, or both.
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| EXPORTSMGR | Export script manager.Open the Export script manager where you can create, edit, and delete export scripts. You can also run an export script from the script manager by selecting the script and clicking the Run button. For Help, Press F1 while creating a script. The scripts are stored as files of the same name in the \Shared\ImportExport\ folder. If the script file name is ticked, the script is visible on the EXPORT menu and the file extension is .xi. If not ticked, it is not visible, and .xi_.
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| EXPORTXS | Export cross section data in Terramodel .XSC format.Export or list a selected surface from a roadway as cross sections in Terramodel .XSC file format with a chainage range. Specify Segment 1, unless you are using chainage equations. The report includes the offset and elevation of each point at each chainage.
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| EXTEND | Extend a line to boundaries or by a distance.If "To bdy" is ticked, extend a pline or set to the first of the selected boundaries. If "To bdy" is not ticked, extend by a specified distance. The end of the line is moved to the new location, with the option of creating a new point at the previous end location. Spirals and vertical curves cannot be extended.
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| FAVORITES | Favourite commands.Edit a history of up to 30 Terramodel favourite and most recently used commands. Commands from this history are available by right-clicking in the graphics area when prompted for a Terramodel command. Enable command completion to anticipate commands from this history as you type.
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| FBLOCK | Import ASCII points into square regions in separate project files.Import ASCII points into separate Terramodel project files for each square data region of the nominated size. The input data format is assumed to be E N Z or E,N,Z. Blank lines and lines starting with '#' are ignored. For example, if the region size is 1000m, all points with X between 0 and 1000 and also Y between 0 and 1000, are added to one Terramodel project, whereas those points with X between 0 and 1000 but Y between 1000 and 2000, would be added to a different Terramodel project file, and so on. Project Variable MAX_NUMBER_OF_FILES restricts the number of files open. The default is 100.
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| FILLET | Create a curve by radius at the intersection of two set segments or two pline segments.
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| FILTER | Filter vertices in plines.Replace selected plines with plines made up of straight segments within a filter "box". This will usually reduce the number of vertices for plines containing straights, such as contours, and increase the vertices for splines, arcs and spirals. The initial filter box is of the specified length and orientated to the first segment on the pline with width perpendicular to the segment. FILTER checks for additional vertices that are contained within the limits of the filter box. Any vertices inside the box are discarded. The first vertex found outside the box is kept, and the last discarded vertex inside the box is added back to the pline. The tube is then reoriented based on the last two vertices, and the process is repeated. See also BLFILTER, GCFILTER and SETFILT.
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| FIXDTM | Fix breaklines connected to duplicate points in layer 0.For each set on the selected DTM layer, wherever the set is connected to a point on layer 0, and there is another point on the selected layer at the same X and Y location, change the set to connect to the point on the DTM layer instead. For any such points found, P3Pad reports the point numbers and "Swapping point number in set". When duplicate contourable points are on a layer and any DTM is formed, one of the points is relayered to layer 0. If one of the points is connected to a set, the point in the set is usually changed so to enable the breakline and "Set Node changed" is shown in the message scroll. Use FIXDTM command when the automatic DTM formation does not correct the point number in the set. GC31 will also fix this problem.
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| FIXDYNA | Replace dynaviewed plotboxes with new plotbox records.Create a new plotbox pline to replace each selected plotbox which has an associated dynaview and change the parent of the dynaview to the new plotbox. You can also delete the old plotbox and plines and text referring to the plotbox. Use FIXDYNA when you have many dynaviews, and visibility of objects in some dynaviews is incorrect because you have lost track of object referencing.
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| FIXLAYERS | Fix layers.Repair layers that cannot be used to compute end-area volumes. When you delete multiple empty layers using LAYERSET in Terramodel 10.20 only, LAYERSET can corrupt a layer attribute in the project so that Terramodel cannot compute volumes by end-area using commands such as AVGEND, EARTHWRK and TEMPLATE, and materials are not shaded in colour. Fix these layers in the current project by running FIXLAYERS at the Terramodel command line.
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| FLIPDOWN | Copy objects from an elevation view into a plan view.Copy selected objects from an "Elevation" view into an drawing in a selected "Plan" view. The objects are referenced to the original object. This enables you to label a point with the original point number, elevation, etc. using EAT codes.
See also FLIPUP, BGELEV and GC56.
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| FLIPUP | Copy objects from a plan view into an elevation view.Copy selected objects from a plan view into an "Elevation" drawing in a selected view. The chainage of the point along the selected baseline determines the x-coordinate, while the elevation of the point determines the y-coordinate position. The objects maintain the layer, colour and linetype of the original points. The name of the new object is the original name plus the baseline name and original point number, X, Y and Z. The objects are referenced to the original object. This enables you to label a point with the original point number, elevation, etc. using EAT codes. See also FLIPDOWN, BGELEV and GC56.
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| FONTCHNG | List or change fonts of selected text.Report which fonts (typefaces) are used by selected text objects or change all selected of that font to a specified font. Use this to fix text with incorrect fonts. The From list shows only fonts used by any of the selected text. The To list lists alphabetically all fonts which have been loaded into Terramodel or listed in p3server.ini. If Terramodel cannot find a corresponding FNT file for a font, the font of the text is still changed to that font, but is displayed with the default font, usually TMODELF. To add a new font to the To List, place the FNT file into the fonts folder, specify that font in TEXTMETRICS or STYLESET, then add to the ini file when prompted. See also LISTFONT and TEXTMETRICS.
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| FORESTRD | Apply horizontal design to a road alignment.Select a registered HAL of IPs, check the settings and then press Enter. The result is a road fully designed in horizontal, including fitting of curves, templates, transitions, superelevation and widening. In conjunction with VAL Editor, design a long road in minutes! Keep any of your existing curves, superelevation, widening, xlines, and existing profile, or update them. The settings include design speed, default cross slope, pavement and shoulder width and widening ratio. Great for forest, haul and mountain roads where the same design criteria apply for most of the length. Use WALK to get the initial alignment if based on constant grade, otherwise just pick some IPs. Use RDVALEDIT to design the vertical alignment. Then modify your horizontal and vertical design to accommodate variations such as intersections. FORESTRD and a prototype file are customised according to your requirements which could match those of any road authority. The default is setup for NSW RTA and Forestry Tasmania. See also FORESTTB.
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| FORESTTB | Report offsets for a forest road.Use with FORESTRD.
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| FRGOUT | Export FM 700 Full Road Geometry (.FRG) file.Specify the centreline HAL of a road and records to setout and export this to an .FRG file. This file can then be used to store the full road geometry on Nikon DTM-800 series and Zeiss total stations running Fast Map 700 Road Engineer software. This can then be used for checking and setting out complex surfaces and alignments. FM700 has built-in Quality Assurance. The default HAL is the active alignment, if set. If the VAL is picked, the elevations are the difference between the height of the object and the VAL, otherwise the elevations are from the points.
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
F7
![]() |
Toggle point number labels.Label points with point numbers. Run F7 again to turn point numbers off. Replace any point labels placed by F9 or F11 with different predefined point labels so that the only the point numbers toggle and the visibility of the elevation and name labels is unchanged. Other point symbols and other blocks are unchanged.The size is dependent on the current view scale at time of creation. To change the size, change the view scale with VIEWSET or VIEWSCAL then toggle off then on. The colour of the label is the same as the point colour. The point labels are the same as those placed by LABELPOINT. These point labels are intended for quick use while editing your data. If you are drafting, use LABPT, BLOCK or AUTODRAFT instead for control over colours, size, layers and so on.
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
F8
![]() |
Toggle circle symbols.Label points with circle symbols (symbol 40). Run F8 again to turn circle symbols off. Blocks, point labels and other symbols are unchanged. The size is dependent on the current view scale at time of creation. To change the size, change the view scale with VIEWSET or VIEWSCAL then toggle off then on. The colour of the label is the same as the point colour. The point labels are the same as those placed by LABELPOINT. These labels are intended for quick use while editing your data. If you are drafting, use LABPT, BLOCK or AUTODRAFT instead for control over colours, size, layers and so on. See also F8C which allows you to control the symbol number and size and F8T which places a temporary marker.
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| F8C | Toggle preset symbol.Label points with preset symbols. Run F8C again to turn preset symbols off. Blocks, point labels and other symbols are unchanged. To preset the symbol, use PROJECTV to create or set the Integer project variable "F8C:Symbol_Number" to the desired symbol. The default symbol is 34 (+). The symbol size is dependent on the current view scale at time of creation. To change the size, change the view scale with VIEWSET or VIEWSCAL then toggle off then on. To preset the symbol size, use PROJECTV to create or set the Double project variable "F8C:Symbol_Height" to the desired height in sheet units. The default height is 0.10. The colour of the label is the same as the point colour. The point labels are the same as those placed by LABELPOINT. These labels are intended for quick use while editing your data. If you are drafting, use LABPT, BLOCK or AUTODRAFT instead for control over colours, size, layers and so on. See also F8 which uses symbol 40 (circle) and F8T which places a temporary marker. To make F8C readily accessible, launch with the F8 function key using an ALIAS from F8C to F8.
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| F8T | Place temporary markers on points.Place temporary markers on all points in visible layers. The marker size is dependent on the current view scale. The markers are temporary and disappear after refresh. They are not plotted. The marker colour is not the same as point colour. Blocks, symbols and point labels are unchanged. To make F8T readily accessible, launch with the F8 function key using an ALIAS from F8T to F8.
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
F9
![]() |
Toggle elevations.Label points with elevations. Run F9 again to turn elevations off. Replace any point labels placed by F7 or F11 with different predefined point labels so that the only the elevations toggle and the visibility of the point number and name labels is unchanged. Point symbols, blocks and other point labels are unchanged. The size is dependent on the current view scale at time of creation. To change the size, change the view scale with VIEWSET or VIEWSCAL then toggle off then on. The colour of the label is the same as the point colour. The point labels are the same as those placed by LABELPOINT. These labels are intended for quick use while editing your data. If you are drafting, use LABPT, BLOCK or AUTODRAFT instead for control over colours, size, layers and so on.
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
F11
![]() |
Toggle names.Label points with names (descriptions). Run F11 again to turn names off. Replace any point labels placed by F7, F9 or F11 with different predefined point labels so that the only the names toggle and the visibility of the point number and elevation labels is unchanged. Point symbols, blocks and other point labels are unchanged. The size is dependent on the current view scale at time of creation. To change the size, change the view scale with VIEWSET or VIEWSCAL then toggle off then on. The colour of the label is the same as the point colour. The point labels are the same as those placed by LABELPOINT. These labels are intended for quick use while editing your data. If you are drafting, use LABPT, BLOCK or AUTODRAFT instead for control over colours, size, layers and so on.
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| GARMININ | Import a Garmin GPS Waypoint (.wpt) file.
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| GARMINOU | Export a Garmin GPS Waypoint (.wpt) file.
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| GC01 | Remove characters in a name by a range of character positions.Nominate the start and end character positions. The range is inclusive. To remove characters within the range, select Delete. To retain only those characters within the range, do not select Delete. The values are stored as project variables. Note that for text objects, the name is the same as the text value. See also SNR.
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| GC02 | Change the name of selected points to include chainage and offset from HAL.Optionally include chainage, offset, label HAL Pts and append or replace. See also NFS for chainage only.
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| GC03 | Report chainage and offset from HAL and VAL.Report Pt Number, Chainage, Offset, Elev, Val difference, Name and optionally, Coordinates, Vertical differences to a design DTM, up to five headings and a footer. In the Headings dialog, you can "Create CSV file" for use in spreadsheets The report includes pline vertices. If the HAL is a 3D set, and you do not select a VAL, the elevation differences will be to the set. The HAL can be extended past the end of the HAL record. Chainages are measured horizontally. See also GC03A to use a master HAL, GC14 for 3D chainages and GC03DRN for an as-built drain report.
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| GC03A | Report chainage and offset from master HAL.Report Pt Number, Chainage, Offset, Elev, Val difference, Name and optionally, Coordinates, Vertical differences to a design DTM, up to five headings and a footer. Specify points, a master HAL and a design Line. In the Headings dialog, you can "Create CSV file" for use in spreadsheets The report includes pline vertices. If the HAL is a 3D set, and you do not select a VAL, the elevation differences will be to the set. The HAL can be extended past the end of the HAL record. Chainages are measured horizontally. See also GC03, GC14 for 3D chainages and GC03DRN for an as-built drain report.
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| GC03DRN | Report chainage and design offset As-Built report from HAL and VAL.Report selected points showing Pt Number, Chainage, As-built Offset, Design Offset, As-built Height, Design Height, Height difference from VAL, Design Grade, As-Built Grade, Name, Easting and Northing. You can select points, a HAL and VAL, and enter the design offset, and tolerances for Horizontal, Vertical and Grade. See also GC03.
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| GC03DUAL | Report chainage and offset from two HAL and VAL pairs.Report Pt Number, Chainage, Offset, Elev, Val difference, Name and optionally, Coordinates, Vertical differences to a design DTM, up to five headings and a footer. In the Headings dialog, you can "Create CSV file" for use in spreadsheets and specify a secondary HAL and VAL. The report includes pline vertices. If the HAL is a 3D set, and you do not select a VAL, the elevation differences will be to the set. The HAL can be extended past the end of the HAL record. Chainages are measured horizontally. See also GC14 for 3D chainages and GC03DRN for an as-built drain report.
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| GC04 | Create mid-points on short plines.Where a two-point pline is less than a minimum length, create a mid-point. If the mid-point of the next pline is in the same location, the duplicate point is omitted. A common use is to create a single point on each pair of crossing plines imported from CAD. See also ILINE to intersect lines, GC31 and DIVIDE command.
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| GC05 | Calculate the centre of mass between two DTMs.
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| GC06 | Round elevations in project file.Changes elevations to rounded values. Only use GC06 where you cannot round the displayed values with EAT codes or precision settings.
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| GC07 | Helmert transformation.Using pairs of points, compute a best fit of shift, rotation and scale then transform the selected data.
The HMT file contains three pairs of parameters on one line. The first two combine to store rotation and scale, the second locates the data centroid and the third, locates the control centroid. If a HMT file contains two lines, the first line is a heading displayed in the message scroll and the second line contains the parameters. See also GC38 for Affine transformation, which uses different scale factors in North and East, and GC3DROT, GC3DADJfor 3D transformation. If shifting, rotating or scaling around a single point, use MOVE, SCALE, ROTATE or RTSCALE.
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| GC09 | Places blocks or symbols by group.A mapping file (default = Geocomp.map) determines the block or symbol, the size and scaling behaviour. If the group =0, no symbol is placed. Most import TMLs written by Geocomp Systems set a group for each object. If you import or create objects in other ways you will need to assign groups to use this function. GCIMPORT enables this method during the import by selecting "Map Points and Circles with Blocks or Symbols". To place the blocks or symbols at a later stage, use GC09 after setting groups where required. To replace circles with blocks by group (for example tree canopies), use GCIMPORT or GCINSBLK.
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| GC10 | List and sum area, 2D length and 3D length.For each selected pline or set, report the horizontal or slope length and the totals. Optionally, report areas of closed figures. No areas are shown for open records, and no slope distance is calculated if any points have no elevations. Use for estimating kerbs, pipes, paving and so on. This report is designed to be printed.
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| GC100 | Report thickness between two DTMs at selected points.For each selected point, report the Point number, Chainage, Offset, Easting, Northing, Thickness and Name. The thickness is the interpolated elevation from the Upper DTM less the Lower DTM. Where the thickness is expressed as a negative value, the Upper DTM is below the Lower DTM. Where a point is outside either DTM, the thickness is shown as *. Points outside the selected Roadjob are marked "Outside Roadjob".
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| GC10CSV | List and sum area, 2D length and 3D length.For each selected pline or set, report the horizontal or slope length, the totals. Optionally, report areas of closed figures. No areas are shown for open records, and no slope distance is calculated if any points have no elevations. Use for estimating kerbs, pipes, paving and so on. This report is comma-separated so it can be saved as a CSV file for use in a spreadsheet application.
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| GC12DIN | Import 12D ASCII file.Import 2D, 3D, arc, text and alignment strings from .12DA file. You can specify a user-defined comma-separated mapping files for colour, layer name and line styles. Colour mapping files with extension .CNN are in the format in the format 12DA colour name, Terramodel colour number. Examples are installed in the \Geocomp folder. The layer name mapping file with extension .LNM is in the format 12DA model name, Terramodel layer number. Terramodel uses the first matching case in the file. If you select an .LNM file, any new model names in the .12DA file are added to the end of the file. Layer names that are longer than 16 characters are shortened to fit. If you select an .LSM file, any new line styles in the .12DA file are added to the end of the file. If you leave a LNM or LSM mapping file field blank, you are prompted to create a new one using suggested values adopted for records found in the 12DA file. Horizontal, vertical and slope alignments from super alignment strings are imported as plines and registered. Hidden segments can be ignored. Arc centres are hidden. They can be made visible by ARCENTRE.
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| GC12DOUT | Export 12D ASCII file.Export .12DA file for 12D software. You can specify objects, a DTM layer, file name, a colour map, a layer name map and a line style map.
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| GC14 | Report the chainage and offset of points measured along HAL and VAL.Report selected objects showing Pt Number, Chainage, Offset, Height, Height difference from Vertical Alignment, 3D chainage, 3D offset, Distance travelled and Description/name. See also GC03.
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| GC14R | Report chainage and offset in TMS ProFit XY format.This .DAT file is used for processing tunnel as-built reports in TMS ProFit software by Amberg Technologies. See also GC14.
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| GC14S | Report the chainage and offset of points measured along HAL and VAL, sorted by chainage and offset.Report selected objects showing Pt Number, Chainage, Offset, Height, Height difference from Vertical Alignment, 3D chainage, 3D offset, Distance travelled and Description/name. See also GC14.
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| GC14SET | Report the chainage and offset of points measured along alignment set.Report selected objects showing Pt Number, Chainage, Offset, Height, Height difference from set3D chainage, 3D offset, Distance travelled and Description/name. See also GC03.
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| GC15 | Delete selected plines and sets with total length inside a specified range.Prompt for records, minimum and maximum total length. Points will also be deleted with sets. GC15 is useful for cleaning up lines of unwanted hatching or symbols from imported data.
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| GC16 | Change line colour and linestyle based upon group.Modify the line colour and linetype of selected objects according the group number of each object using a mapping file such as GEOCOMP.CLT. See also GC16ADC, COLRLINE, GCIMPORT and GCCSVIN.
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| GC16ADC | Modify colour based upon AutoDraft report.Modify the colours of selected objects by layer to match the colours they would have if set by AutoDraft. GC16ADC requires an ADC report file which you can create in AUTODRAFT by selecting the Full Report. Blocks names are also changed to match. See also GC16.
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| GC17 | Calculate where points on a set intersect a nominated DTM layer given bearing and slope.
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| GC18 | Report chainage and elevation along a VAL.
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| GC20 | Compute the cut and fills volumes of selected boundaries and places them in a report.Compute the cut & fill volume for selected sets or plines. The results for the individual boundaries are placed in the report. The total cut & fill volumes are also calculated and placed in the report. Also shows the ranges in x, y and z.
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| GC21 | Change the default Callout Style.Change or establish the current callout style recorded in tmodwin.ini. For example, GC21 Date to set the current callout style to Date. Use with an alias or toolbar. See CALLOUT.
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| GC22 | Check DTM Edge and design boundaries.Relayer all contourable 3D points outside the boundary set from the DTM layer to another layer. Report which points are relayered. Check boundary for closure and usage of all boundary points and segments.
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| GC23 | Create a set where slopes from points intersect a DTM.See also DTMSHOT, SIDESLOPE and SLICE.
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| GC24 | Bowditch adjustment of a lot or traverse.Adjusts heights if present on points. Puts the adjusted set on layer "ADJUSTED". Optionally, specify a closing point. Only works with sets, not plines.
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| GC25 | Compute a single isopach from two DTMs.Compute a temporary DTM surface of the elevation difference from two DTMs then from that surface interpolate isopachs. These isopachs represent the locations where the elevation differences between the surfaces are equal to the nominated value. Use the isopach elevation of 0.00 to create cut/fill lines. Cut/fill lines indicate where the DTMs intersect and thus the the boundary between cut and fill areas. Select whether to create a 2D pline or 3D set. The name of the new pline or set is "Cut/Fill Line".
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| GC25MULT | Compute multiple isopachs between two DTMs.Create pline isopachs between two DTMs at a specified interval and range and inside specified boundaries.
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| GC26 | Create attribute records for an object.Create up to four new attribute records for an object: two alphanumeric names, one integer and one double precision real number and save them to the attribute definition file geocomp.adf. GC26 is mainly used to demonstrate attributes in Terramodel. You can also delete all attributes, or just new ones. CALLOUT and other EAT code functions can label objects with the new attributes. See also DUMPATT to list attributes on an object. See RMGC as an example of a golf course tree database using attributes. Contact Geocomp Systems if you need commands which use new attributes.
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| GC26GIS | Create attribute database records for an object.Create one or two attribute records in a MS Access database. GC26GIS requires the attribute file TMGIS.ADF. Contact Geocomp Systems if you need Terramodel to link to a database.
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| GC27 | Place chainage labels parallel to xlines.Create text objects on the current layer with chainage values on the left, right or centre of all xlines for the nominated alignment and chainage range, including invisible xlines. You have options to delete old chainage labels and prefix with "Ch" and use a block. The label is prefixed with "Ch ". The number of decimal places is controlled by UNITSSET. The text size is determined by the selected text style. If you use a block, block GC27 will be placed at each end of each Xline perpendicular to the alignment. Edit block GC27 to suit. See also GCXLINES, LABELHAL, LABELPI and GCLABELIP.
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| GC28 | Create 3D points along HAL and VAL with chainage in name.The points are placed within the chainage range, at the nominated interval, xlines or VAL IPs. The elevation is interpolated from the VAL. The name is made up from the nominated name plus the computed chainage indicated by specified text characters. Specify whether or not to join the points with a set. 3D is a similar command with options for offsets and a chainage range.
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| GC28A | Create 3D points along HAL & VAL.The points are placed at the nominated interval with the nominated name. The elevation is interpolated from the VAL. See also 3D which creates sets at offsets.
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| GC29 | Compute distance and direction with 3D components.In the plan view, report the bearing and distance between two locations. If you select two points, or a set segment, and both points have elevations, you will also get the height difference, vertical angle and slope distance. If you select a free location, the elevation will be interpolated from the current DTM layer, if possible. In section views, report the horizontal distance, slope distance and grade. Enter "GC29 segment" at the command line, to start in segment mode.
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| GC29UTM | Compute and label ellipsoidal distance and direction.In the plan view only, report the ellipsoidal distance, plane distance, line scale factor, grid bearings (forward and back) and arc to chord between two locations. Using the Settings, you can also label the bearings and distances with specified layer, text style and colours.
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| GC30 | Report coordinates and elevation difference measured vertically to DTM.Report for each selected point, the point number, easting, northing, point elevation, DTM elevation, vertical elevation difference and name. The average vertical elevation difference, and RMS, is included. You can choose a tolerance range, a stripping depth and the sign convention for the difference in elevation.
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| GC30A | Report coordinates and elevation difference measured vertically to DTM, with Horizontal alignment.Report for each selected point, the point number, easting, northing, point elevation, DTM elevation, vertical elevation difference and name. The average vertical elevation difference, and RMS, is included. You can choose a tolerance range, a stripping depth and the sign convention for the difference in elevation. You can also create text objects showing the difference in metres or millimetres.
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| GC30PERP | Report coordinates and elevation difference measured perpendicular to DTM.Report for each selected point, the point number, easting, northing, point elevation, DTM elevation, elevation difference perpendicular to DTM and name. The average elevation difference perpendicular to the DTM, and RMS, is included. You can choose a tolerance range, a stripping depth and the sign convention for the difference in elevation.
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| GC31 | Duplicate point removal on a layer with tolerances.Specify tolerances in X, Y and Z. One point is retained and the others are moved to layer 0 for possible later deletion. Select Report to generate a report as the duplicate points are removed. You can choose "Mean Pts" to create the remaining point with coordinates at the mean of the points, or retain thepoint with the highest or lowest elevation. If none of the options are selected, the remaining point is the lowest point number within tolerance. Hints:
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| GC32 | Report visible layers in layerlists.List the visibility status of each layer in each layerlist. The list includes the colour, linetype and number of objects for each layer.
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| GC33 | Create a DTM from the upper or lower regions of two DTMs.Create a DTM on the selected Higher DTM or Lower DTM layer from those all the regions of the two selected DTM layers. The new DTM covers the extent of both DTMs, with small gaps at the transitions to avoid overlaps. Points are omitted from the new layer within a narrow band the width of the entered "Clip Dist". For best results, the clip dist should be around 0.01 metres. Breaklines interpolated by draping from the original surfaces are created in the new surface half way between the band edges and the cut/fill lines. The gap between the new breaklines is therefore half the clip distance. GC33 is great for use with complex cut and fill volume estimation.
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| GC33MULT | Create a DTM from the upper (or lower) components of multiple DTMs.Select a starting DTM, typically the largest, and a layer list of the other DTM layers. Nominate the name of the final higher or lower DTM layer. A new surface is created from the starting DTM and the first DTM in the layer list. That surface is then compared with the next DTM in the layer list, and so on in alphabetical order, which can be also date order in a suitable layer naming convention. The new DTM covers the extent of all selected DTMs, with small gaps at the transitions to avoid overlaps. Points are omitted from the new layer within a narrow band the width of the entered "Clip Dist". For best results, the clip dist should be around 0.01 metres. Breaklines interpolated by draping from the original surfaces are created in the new surface half way between the band edges and the cut/fill lines. The gap between the new breaklines is therefore half the clip distance. GC33MULT is great for use with complex cut/fill volume estimation.
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| GC34 | Find and report a nominated point by number.Type in or pick a point then either highlight with concentric circles, recentre the display or recentre the display and zoom by 10x. The message scroll also reports the point number, easting, northing, elevation, name, layer, view, group, colour, contourability, set and whether an arc centre. See also RECENTER which recentres the display where you pick.
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| GC35 | Create points at centroids of plines and sets.The elevation is derived from the pline or, if a set, the mean elevation of the points. This is commonly used to compute circle centres.
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| GC36 | Move points onto a HAL.Move selected points perpendicular to (or square off) the HAL until the offset is zero. See also GC86 to move the points by a distance.
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| GC37 | Create or report cross sections at intersection of strings with xlines.Create cross sections by intersecting selected sets and plines with xlines of a nominated alignment. Control the output by selecting one of more of these tick boxes:
The DTM is not used. If you have a road defined by sets along string lines, to make a roadway:
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| GC38 | Affine Transformation.Using up to 10 Control Point/Data Point pairs, compute a best fit of shift, rotation, north scale and east scale and then transform the selected data, and report the residuals. Text and blocks are shifted, rotated and scaled, but not skewed with the rest of the data. To skew text or blocks too, explode first. See also GC07 for Helmert transformation, which computes a single scale factor.
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| GC39 | Move intersection point and update Xlines.Delete the Xlines on the main registered HAL of a roadway and place new Xlines at alignment points and at the nominated interval. If you pick the main registered hal, you can move the nearest intersection point to a new location. The new Xlines will all have the left and right extents of the first of the original Xlines. Use GCXLINES to create new xlines including hal points or to change offsets.
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| GC3DADJ | 3D Conformal adjustment.Transform selected points, text and blocks in 3D, maintaining the shape but applying 3D scaling, rotation and shift. Use up to 10 control/data point pairs. To keep the points at the current 3D distances, fix the scale factor to 1.0. Check the report for Sigma Zero value and other potential problems before completing the transformation. 2D points can be transformed using a default elevation. Plines are not transformed. Possible uses:
See also GC3DROT for incremental rotation about 0,0,0, GC07 for Helmert transformation, which transforms in plan using a single scale computed factor and ROT3D which transforms in 3D space using exactly 3 control/data point pairs.
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| GC3DROT | Rotate points in 3D around 0,0,0 in increments.Rotate selected points, text and blocks around 0,0,0, in radian increments. The default is 0.1 radians. Use buttons to zoom in, zoom out and fit to display. You can use GC3DROT to see how something will look if rotated, or to create isometric views. Because the coordinates of the points are modified, we suggest that you GCREVIEW the objects into View 6, without deleting the old objects.
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| GC3DSETS | Find the closest 3D distance between two sets.The closest distance in 3D is displayed in the message scroll. You can also create the points and a joining set on a specified layer. Useful for determining whether sets meet minimum 3D distance requirements. If you need to check the clearance from the outside of pipes, trenches or holes, you may need to create multiple 3D sets at offsets to work with. See also GC75 for instantaneous horizontal distance perpendicular to an alignment.
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| GC3PTARC | Create a two-arc set through three points.Create sets consisting of two arcs connecting three points in a nominated order. THREEPC is similar, but the middle point is not part of the single-arc set. The difference is most noticeable when all three points have elevations, and you are using functions that interpolate elevations along sets. For example, if the middle point is a low or high point in a kerb or channel, a correct DTM requires ARCBL to take the elevation of the middle point into account, which can only happen if the middle point is included in the set. See also BFITCURV, ARC,ARC2P and ARC2PSET.
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| GC40 | Compare points in two layers by coordinates.Compare points in two nominated layers and list the differences in easting, northing and elevation. Settings include minimum distance for comparison and point comparison tolerances (in x, y and z). The standard report is in the format: Point Point Bearing Distance DEast DNorth DElev Name_Pt1 Name_Pt2 The Expanded report format is: Point East North Elev Name Point East North Elev Name DEast DNorth
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| GC40A | Compare points in two layers by coordinates using search ranges.Compare points in two nominated layers using search ranges and list the differences in easting, northing and elevation. Settings include minimum distance for comparison, point comparison search ranges (in x, y and z) and point tolerances in plan and elevation. The Basic report format is: Point Point Bearing Distance DEast DNorth DElev Name_Pt1 Name_Pt2 The Expanded report format is: Point East North Elev Name Point East North Elev Name DEast DNorth DElev
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| GC40M | Compare points in two layers by coordinates using alignment.Compare points in two nominated layers and list the differences in easting, northing and elevation. Settings include minimum distance for comparison, point comparison search ranges (in x, y and z), point tolerances in plan and elevation and whether to report as comma separated values. The Basic report format is: Number East North Elev DEast DNorth DElev Name The Expanded report format is: Chainage Offset Elev Elev DElev Name
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| GC40PILE | Pile ReportReport piles using points in two nominated layers. Compare points in two layers representing piles. The report can include vectors and either coordinates or chainages and offsets from the active alignment. You can configure the search ranges, tolerance, headings and footer.
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| GC40RAKE | Pile rake reportReport pile rakes using points at top and bottom of the piles in two nominated layers.
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| GC40TEXT | Label points in two layers with differences.Label points in two nominated layers with differences in easting, northing and elevation.
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| GC41 | Show obstructions in profile view.Create and label points where the specified HAL crosses selected objects or passes near selected points. This clearly shows where an alignment is relative to a pipe network. The obstructions are labelled in the profile view with circles and text. The circle plines have diameters equal to the specified Obs Ht with another circle drawn inside. If obvert is selected, the top of the circle is placed at the elevation. If invert, the bottom of the circle. The circle will appear as an ellipse if the profile view has a vertical exaggeration other than 1.0 in VIEWSET. You can create points on the CLASH POINTS layer in the plan view.
See also XSLABEL to add obstructions to cross section plots and SET2PRFL to draw pipes in Profile.
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| GC42 | Report point elevation minus roadway elevation.The design elevations are calculated from the roadway, not just the cross sections. Where no elevation difference can be determined, the points are marked with *. The basic report shows the chainage, offset, elevation difference and point name. The extended report shows the point number, chainage, offset, elevation, design elevation, elevation difference and point name.
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| GC42AB | As-built roadway report.Compare points from an as-built roadway survey with the roadway design. The design elevations are calculated from the roadway, not just the cross sections. Where no elevation difference can be determined, the points are marked with *. Nominate roadway, depth, tolerances, and whether to compare with the design pavement or batter. The heading shows the roadway name and description, the desired depth of the layer of material (default = 0) and the tolerances above and below that depth. The pavement report shows point number, chainage, offset, design elevation, surveyed elevation, difference, an indication when out of tolerance, point name and, optionally, design and as-built slopes. The pavement difference is the surveyed elevation minus design elevation in mm measured vertically. The batter report shows point number, chainage, offset, design elevation, surveyed elevation, difference, an indication when out of tolerance, point name and, optionally, design and as-built slopes. The batter difference is the surveyed elevation minus design elevation in mm measured perpendicular to the design at depth. You are prompted whether to report the horizontal offset to the batter. If the Section Tolerance is positive, the results are sorted by offset within chainage bands. If zero or negative, they are sorted by chainage only. The end of the report shows the number of points, mean of differences, mean of positive differences, mean of negative differences and standard deviation. You have the option of also writing the report to a CSV file.
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| GC42ABS | Select as-built points within tolerance of roadway design.Selects points within tolerance of roadway. Use Previous to reselect the points in another command. Nominate roadway, depth, tolerances, and whether to compare against the design pavement or batter.
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| GC42DTM | Compare DTM triangles within tolerance of roadway design.Compares DTM points, triangle centroids and link midpoints to a roadway. Nominate roadway, DTM layer, depth, tolerances, and whether to compare against the design pavement or batter. See also DESIGNELEV, GC42 and GC42AB.
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| GC42HAL | Compare as-built points with HAL in selected Roadway.
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| GC42KB | Compare as-built points with HAL and design kerb set.Compare surveyed points with a design set, such as a kerb. Report chainage and offset from selected alignment, offset difference and height difference from set, Easting, Northing, Height, Design Height and Name. Select Inside/Outside and chainage range and tolerance. To get chainage, offset, offset difference and height difference from a set, use the same object for both the set and the alignment.
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| GC42VAL | Compare as-built points with VAL in selected Roadway.
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| GC43 | Report surface or horizontal areas of shapes in a roadjob.Estimate approximate areas quickly. This report is presented in chainage ranges. The length of shape is reported for each chainage. Assumptions:
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| GC43CSV | Report surface or horizontal areas of shapes in a roadjob based on chainages, to a comma-delimited file.See also GC43.
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| GC43S | Report surface or horizontal areas of shapes in a roadjob based on chainages, within surface materials.Only computes areas within a selected surface material.
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| GC43SCSV | Report surface or horizontal areas of shapes in a roadjob based on chainages, within surface materials to a CSV.Only computes areas within a selected surface material.
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| GC44 | Report surface or horizontal areas of a DTM based on chainages.The centroid of each triangle is checked for limits of chainage range, boundary and corridor width. Then the horizontal or surface areas of all selected triangles, including parts of triangles outside the limits, are calculated and reported.
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| GC44CSV | Report surface or horizontal areas of a DTM based on chainages, to a comma-delimited file.GC44CSV is similar to GC44.
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| GC44S | Calculate surface or horizontal areas of a DTM based on chainages, within surface materials.This is similar to GC44, except it only computes the values where the centroid is within a selected surface material.
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| GC45 | Create points along a HAL or VAL at incremental distances.Create points along a pline or set a nominated interval. In the profile view, the distances are measured along on the pline.
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| GC46 | Compute cut volumes between surfaces within blocks.This is ideal for computing excavation volumes in pits, mines and quarries, where there are large numbers of layers of material. Triangles are used, rather than grids, which increases accuracy. Set up the surfaces using Surface Manager. The Finish Surface, which represents the design limit of excavation, needs to cover the extent of the other surfaces. You can also nominate multiple boundaries in plan (="blocks"), an elevation range, and a report style. If a .CSV report style is selected, the resulting comma-separated variable (.CSV) file can be imported into a spreadsheet application for further computation. If a depth surface is nominated an elevation surface is created then deleted.
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| GC47 | Road resheet profiles.Create profiles to use for road resheet design. The selected points in the existing surface are compared against the centreline and templates in the roadjob. A profile is created along the road centreline such that the nominated minimum cover is obtained at the selected points. Two other profiles are also created allowing for variations in the template crossfalls. These three profiles can then be used to help you create the final design vertical alignment. You must have a road job with a hal, val and templates. It is easier to understand if you initially keep the Min% and Max% as 0.00. Select the points in the existing pavement under the proposed road pavement. The command takes each of these points, computes their offsets from the hal, then given the crossfall from the Roadway template, (e.g. 3%), computes a proposed design elevation which is the original elevation plus the crossfall times the offset, adds the Min Cover (e.g. 0.2) to this elevation, then plots a pline in the profile view (and reports to P3Pad). If you then manually draw a Design Vertical Alignment as a pline in the Profile view, that is just above the proposed elevations then you are always guaranteed a Min Cover of 0.2. If you use Min% and Max% that are not 0.00, then you get 2 additional plines in the profile view that use the crossfall from the Roadway template e.g. 3% AND then adds and subtracts the Min% and Max% values to the 3% so you can see the tolerance as you go.
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| GC48 | Create profiles from shapes in a roadway.Select a roadway, chainage range and interval, and selected shapes. The created profiles are ideal for checking grades on kerblines, edge of pavement, and so on.
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| GC49 | Create a point on a line at an elevation.Create a point on the line between two points, at a location such that the new point has the specified elevation.
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| GC50 | Interpolate or extrapolate elevations on 2D points based on 3D points in the same set.See also INT3DSET, INTERP3D and GCRIVER.
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| GC51 | Intersection Design.Design vertical alignments in intersections. A limit of nine alignments allows for four kerb returns, four splitter islands and a roundabout. This simplifies a process which would otherwise require repeated use of profile editing, 3D, DTM creation, etc. Before running this function, design the intersection in 2D and tile plan and profile views so that you can see the updated intersection contours immediately the vertical profiles are edited. To use this function:
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| GC52 | Change the group of selected objects.See also SGRP which has a dialog for keeping track of used groups and SETGRP which sets to the next group.
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| GC53 | Create, list or highlight contourable or non-contourable points.Make, list or highlight contourable or non-contourable points. Non-contourable points are excluded from a DTM, even 3D points on the correct layer. This command can also relink all DTM layers so you can see how changing contourability affected the links. Points imported from Civilcad ASC files using CVDIMPT retain their contourability status. See also 3DFILTER which filters points from a DTM by making them non-contourable. Set this attribute for single points using "include in DTM" in EDIT.
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| GC54 | Apply Geoid-Ellipsoid or Geoid-Spheroid correction.Interpolate the separation from a suitable DTM, and subtract this value from the ellipse height points. For example, subtract N-Values imported from an AUSGEOID98 DAT file. See also AUSGEOID.
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| GC55 | Extrapolate or interpolate heights from two 3D sets onto points in a 2D set using grades along perpendicular bisectors.For each point on the 2D set, the new elevation is on the grade between the 3D sets, along the perpendicular bisector. Construction plines on the current layer can show where the grades were measured. If one of the sets is a DTM edge, and the other draped onto the DTM parallel to and inside the edge, this TML can be used to extend a DTM outwards at approximately the same grade. Alternatively use GC90 or GC91. See also GC55HAL.
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| GC55HAL | Extrapolate or interpolate heights from two 3D sets onto points in a 2D set using grades perpendicular to HAL.For each point on the 2D set, the new elevation is on the grade between 3D sets, perpendicular to the selected HAL. Construction plines on the current layer can show where the grades were measured. See also GC55.
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| GC56 | Swap in X,Y or Z.Swap either X with Y, X with Z or Y with Z. Alternatively, mirror around X or Y axes. Adjust for coordinates the wrong way around, contour walls using terrestrial photogrammetry, move or rotate structures in 3D, etc. Handles points, plines, blocks and text. Functions that may be useful in conjunction: SCALEELV, RTSCALE, MIRROR, GC07, GC38. See also ROT3D, GC3DROT, BGELEV and FLIPUP.
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| GC57 | Create 3D points from cross sectionsCross sections must be selected in the Xsect View. They may include points.
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| GC58 | Remove duplicate sets, plines and textCompare objects in a layer and moves duplicates to layer 0. Use this to removes redundant objects that have been imported multiple times. Duplicate sets must have identical point numbers (so you might want to remove duplicate points first. See GC31.). Duplicate plines must have all identical vertices, elevation, colour, spline type, etc. Sets and plines can be reversed. Duplicate text must have the same insertion point coordinates, characters, layer, colour, slant, height, rotation, aspect, font, orientation, horizontal justification and vertical justification.
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| GC59 | Quality Assurance report from Geodimeter as-built surveyRead a Geodimeter job file from an as-built survey, compare with a HAL and report. The job file must include the setout points and the corresponding picked-up points. The report includes Design Chainage, Design Offset, Design Elevation, Setout Chainage, Setout Offset, Setout Elevation, Chainage Difference, Offset Difference and Elevation Difference.
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| GC60 | Radial setout report
For each station in turn, all points within the limit are listed. The report shows the station point, setout point, bearing, horizontal distance, elevation difference and name. Use this report in the field to set out points by theodolite or level, where you do not have the ability to upload the station and setout points into a total station. See also STAKE.
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| GC61 | Create a point at a distance along a line between two pointsNominate two points, and a horizontal or slope distance along the line from the first point to the second point. Once the first point is created, the default distance is the last distance entered. The message scroll keeps track of the total distance entered. Choose whether to measure the distance from previous point or the first point. To extrapolate, enter a negative distance or a total distance greater than the distance between the points. If the points have elevations, the elevation is interpolated.
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| GC63 | Intersect batter defined by two sets with DTMFor each Xline, the grade between the sets is extended until it meets the DTM. The created points are joined to create the intersection between the batter and the DTM. A vertical or perpendicular offset (negative for down) can be applied to the batter.
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| GC64 | Intersect two slopes each defined by two setsCreate points on the slope between two sets where it meets the slope between another two sets. The created points are placed at each xline of the selected HAL. The xline must extend past the intersection. The points are then joined to create a set at the intersection of the two slopes. One pair of sets is the "design" and the other is the "batter". For example, the "design" sets may be on the bottom of subgrade and the "batter" sets may be on a batter. You can also use this to find the low point of a median strip with the "design" being the right batter of a left carriageway and the "batter" being the left batter of a right carriageway. Vertical or perpendicular offsets (negative for down) can be applied to both slopes.
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| GC64BIT | Fix initialisation to suit 64-bit or 32-bit Windows.Correct the TSP, macro, menu and callout folders in a tmodwin.ini file copied from another computer to suit the current version of Windows 64-bit or 32-bit Windows and add Geocomp Update to the Terramodel Search Path (TSP). If you copy tmodwin.ini from a computer with 32-bit Windows to one with 64-bit Windows, or vice versa, the path for the Geocomp Update, macro, menu and loaded callout styles will be incorrect. When you next start Terramodel, your toolbar may have grey buttons, your menu may be different and commands with names starting with GC are not found. When this happens, type GC64BIT at the command line to update the TSP, macro and menu folders then restart Terramodel. The Terramodel initialisation file tmodwin.ini contains the configuration of the Terramodel user interface including the display colours of objects, background, cursor and highlighting, plotters and printers, workspace, toolbar, menu, search path, reports, favourites, view labels, callouts and coordinate scroll. P3server.ini contains settings for maximum number of objects, and the names of fonts, point labels and your prototype project file. Tmodwin.ini is installed into C:\Program files\Trimble\Terramodel\Locale\English on 32-bit Windows or C:\Program files (x86)\Trimble\Terramodel\Locale\English on 64-bit Windows if you select British English. If you select a different language during installation, the last folder is different, for example ..\English (US). The location can be elsewhere if the Windows environment variable has been set, or if Terramodel is not running As Administrator, but that is not recommended as great confusion ensues. GCHELP displays the location of the tmodwin.ini and TSP in use. In the same way, p3server.ini can be in C:\Program files\Trimble\Shared\Locale\English or C:\Program files (x86)\Trimble\Shared\Locale\English. Terramodel searches the TSP for many user-editable files including the prototype project, workspace, toolbar buttons, TML commands and aliases. The Geocomp Update adds C:\Program files (x86)\Trimble\Terramodel\Geocomp or C:\Program files\Trimble\Terramodel\Geocomp to the front of the Terramodel Search Path so Terramodel can find the files added by the Geocomp Update. You can also add your own custom folder to the TSP. TSP displays the files found in the TSP. To copy your configuration from your old computer to a new computer, copy your tmodwin.ini, p3server.ini, prototype file and custom folder if you have one then run GC64BIT if, after restarting Terramodel, the menu buttons are incorrect. GC64BIT.TML is installed into \Terramodel\TMLs folder so it can always be found. GC64BIT replaces GCTSP.
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| GC65 | Create points by chainage, offset and elevation.If a VAL is selected, enter the elevation difference if any. If VAL is not selected, enter the elevation, or leave it blank for no elevation. Optionally, enter a group. If left blank, the group is 0. Similar to the Ground option of PSTATION. See also See also GC65FILE.
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| GC65FILE | Import points by chainage, offset and elevation.The file is assumed to be a CSV with chainage, offset, elevation or chainage, offset, elevation, name on each line. If a VAL is selected, enter the elevation difference if any. If VAL is not selected, the elevation is used. Blank elevation records are assigned no elevation. Station values can include + characters. See also GC65 to type in values, IMPORTXS to import cross sections into a roadway, ALIGNIMP to import alignments only and ALIGNOFF to import alignment offsets.
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| GC66 | Create breaklines at ridges, valleys or changes of grade, in the specified DTM layer.Ridges are triangle edges where both triangles slope down, valleys are where both triangles slope up and changes of grade are where the grade difference is larger than nominated. This is useful for interpreting and refining DTMs made up from point data. The breaklines are created in the nominated colour on the DTM layer. You have the option of ignoring existing breaklines or creating new breaklines only where there isn't already a breakline.
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| GC67 | Move points onto nearest perpendicular Xlines.For each Xline in turn, find the chainage where the xline crosses the HAL, then find all points within both the specified "Chainage tolerance" distance value and the extent of the Xline, then move each point to the chainage of the Xline while maintaining the offset from the hal. If the Xlines are perpendicular to the hal, and the chainage tolerance is less than half the spacing between the Xlines, this has the same effect as moving points onto the nearest Xline. If "Create XSects" is ticked, the 3D points within the Ch Tol. are used to create cross sections in the XSect view. Cross sections are not sorted on offset. GC67 is useful when working with surveyed cross section point data.
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| GC67A | Move points onto nearest skewed Xlines.For each Xline in turn, find all points within the specified "Sect Tol." distance perpendicular to the xline then move each point to the nearest location on the Xline. If "Create XSects" is ticked, 3D points within the Sect Tol. of the chainage where the Xline crosses the alignment are used to create cross sections in the XSect view. The cross sections are not sorted on offset and do not follow skewed cross sections.
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| GC68 | Add points into sets based on maximum horizontal distance.In selected sets, for each segment longer than the specified maximum horizontal distance, insert new points and create new segments. The new segments may be the exact distance in length or shortened so each new segment is equal length. New arc segments are created using arc lengths. If both the start and end points of the original segment are 3D, elevations interpolated onto the new points. Use GC68 where points are too far apart for commands like SIDESLOPE and DESIGN to work properly. Use GCPTDIST to check whether any segment has less than a minimum length.
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| GC69 | Change zero elevations (Z = 0) to no elevation (Z = *).2D points are often stored in DWG and DXF files as 3D points with elevations equal to zero. Because these elevations are retained when imported into Terramodel, they interfere with DTM formation. Be careful, as there are cases where zero elevations are correct, especially near coastlines. See also GCNOELEV to select all 2D points, GC53 to retain elevations but exclude them from DTM and ELEVATION to change elevations.
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| GC70 | Combine elevation of point and DTM.Compares the elevation of each point with the elevation interpolated from the DTM layer and changes the elevation. The options are: DTM, DTM - Z, DTM + Z, Z - DTM, -Z - DTM, DTM * Z and DTM / Z. For example, use this to convert drill hole depths to absolute elevations. The DTM only option replaces all elevations with interpolated DTM elevations, unlike DTMPTS which only sets the elevations of 2D points. See also DTMMATH and ELEVOBJS.
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| GC71 | Hatch linemarking.Creates two parallel plines on either side of a pline or set, a closes the ends then hatches each closed pline. The offset is half the nominated width in plan units. The pline and hatch are created in same layer as the original line with the colour of the layer. The hatch is solid with spacing = 1. If you use a solid linetype, the resultant line appears to be solid, at nominated width in ground units on the display, independent of view scale and smooth around bends. The line will be plotted wider by the width of the pen assigned to its colour, so use a thin pen. One application is to show line marking. The lines and gaps could be created by survey or by GCPLDICE.
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| GC72 | Report satellite horizon curtain.Compute the vertical angle from selected points to visible sky at a nominated bearing interval. Useful for entry into GPS satellite visibility software.
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| GC73 | Interpolate elevation from VAL.For each selected point, find the chainage along a HAL, interpolate the elevation from a VAL at that chainage, and modify the elevation of the point.
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| GC74 | Set start chainage for multiple HALs.See also SETSTA and CHAINAGE/STATION.
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| GC75 | Show distance and grade between sets or plines at cursor.Display the chainage, horizontal difference, vertical difference and grade between the sets or plines, perpendicular to the selected HAL, in the message scroll area. The HAL may be one of the sets or plines.
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| GC76 | Report on Geodimeter job file.
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| GC77 | Change elevation of text to match subject.Text objects have an elevation of 0.00 by default, even if created by labelling a point with text. Use GC77 to change the elevation of text to the elevation of the subject point. Now when you export to CAD the text will appear at the same height as the point.
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| GC78 | Import profile into profile view.Read a chainage, elevation .CSV file. Alternatively, IMPORT the profile into the plan view then REVIEW.
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| GC79 | Renumber points to same as point names.If the names are alphanumeric, use SYSTEM to set Max Alpha Points high enough. See also PTS2NAME.
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| GC80 | Compare sum of lot areas against boundary.Report the area of each selected set, and compares the area of the largest set against the sum of all the others. In a subdivision, the area of the boundary lot should equal the sum of the areas of all the other lots. If the difference is the size of a lot, look for omitted or duplicated lots of that size. If the difference is smaller, look for incorrectly drawn lots.
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| GC81 | Report alignment.Report coordinates along an alignment. Report curve details and coordinates along a selected alignment at a nominated interval. The curve summary lists the hal record, radius, tangent length, arc length, deflection angle and coordinates of the intersection point, start, centre and end. At the nominated interval, report the chainage, bearing, easting and northing. The coordinates of the start and end chainage are also listed.
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| GC82 | Compute DTM areas by slope ranges within boundary.Within selected boundary polygons, the planimetric (horizontal) and surface areas of the DTM, in plan units and percentage, within predefined slope ranges. The default layer is the current DTM layer. To set the current DTM layer, see DTMCH. The slope ranges are defined in the [Slope Table] section of the TMODWIN.INI file. This table can be manually edited to configure a maximum of 100 slope ranges (by default 16). To set the number of slope ranges, edit the TableSize=# variable. The lines in tmodwin.ini following TableSize define each slope range with boundaries defined by decreasing percentage slope. See also DTMAREA, SLOPE, GC20 and GC44.
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| GC83 | Select objects less than or greater than specified length.Select objects with length less than or greater than a nominated Max Length, from selected sets, plines and text. Objects equal to the length are also selected. The selected objects can then be selected by the next command using Right-Mouse button Previous. For example, to delete all plines less than or equal to 10.0m, first use GC83 to select objects less than or equal to 10.0m long from within a selection of objects of Type Pline. Then DELETE the selected objects using Right-click and Previous.
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| GC84 | Join multiple plines.Join multiple consecutive plines if the ends match locations. See also JOIN.
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| GC86 | Move points relative to alignment.Move points towards or away from an alignment by a nominated amount. Enter a positive offset distance to move the selected points away from the alignment, or negative to move towards. Points closer to the alignment than the negative offset will be moved across the alignment. Points exactly on the alignment, will be moved to the right of the alignment. Use GC86 to move vertical walls by at least 2mm so they can be modelled. Use GC36 to move points exactly onto the alignment.
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| GC87 | Create an elevation DTM from another elevation DTM and a difference DTM.See also ADDISO, GC54 and EARTHWORK.
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| GC88 | Clip or extend a pline to a defined length.
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| GC89 | Create a DTM layer parallel to another DTM.Create new DTM points at the specified distance parallel to the selected DTM. The distances are measured perpendicular to the mean of the slopes of the triangles on each point.
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| GC90 | Extend DTM to point.Create a new point on a DTM layer with elevation extrapolated along the slope of the closest DTM triangle. See also GC91.
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| GC91 | Extend DTM by a horizontal distance.Create points on a DTM layer at a nominated distance along the perpendicular bisectors from each point on the edge of the DTM. The shortest distance from the new point to the existing DTM will be no more than the nominated distance. The elevation on the new point is the average of the elevations extrapolated along the slopes of the two triangles adjacent to the DTM edge point. The new points are assigned the name "Extend Bdy". You may want to create a new DTM edge. If the new point would fall inside the old DTM, it is not created.
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| GC92 | Report or move duplicate points.For all selected points, report which points are within 1 mm horizontal distance and have different elevations, with the option to move those points apart. As Terramodel forms any DTM, wherever there is more than one point with a horizontal proximity of approximately 0.001 ground units (metres or feet), one of those points is left on the DTM layer and the duplicates are relayered to layer 0. If the layer contains string lines that should really be on separate layers, such as top and bottom of kerb, or the layer contains "triangles" created in an application with a proximity tolerance tighter than 1mm, you may not get the desired DTM surface. For this reason, anytime you import data that you intend to contour, from files such as DWG, GENIO or 12DA, you should run GC92 before first running any command that forms a DTM (such as CONTOUR , QPROFILE or TVLITE). If you notice the problem in your contours before running GC92, delete the data, reimport and run GC92 immediately. The GC92 report shows which selected points have vertical elevation differences. Points which have separate layers, no elevation difference or are not contourable, will not affect the DTM. Where the report shows points which will affect the DTM significantly, and you can separate the points by properties such as colour, elevation, "of line" or name, you can use commands to move, delete, relayer or change elevations before forming a DTM. You can also use GC92 to move duplicate points. Where the horizontal distance to a second point is less than 0.0011, the second point is moved in that direction to 0.0011. If you select Repeat, the whole selection set is checked again and remaining duplicates are moved in a different direction this time. You can restrict the movement to along sets such as kerbs. You can include points with the same elevation in the report. See also GC31 which relayers points on a layer that are within a configurable tolerance and GC86 which moves selected points relative to an alignment.
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| GC93 | Mirror or rotate point labels.For all selected points, mirror or rotate point labels. The text on the mirrored point remains legible. The text rotation can be set to any increment of 22.5°.
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| GC94 | Report crossfall between two 3D sets.Report crossfall at xlines between two selected 3D sets. The report optionally includes the chainage, offset and elevation of both sets. You can also create points on the current layer at the intersection of the xlines and the sets.
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| GC95 | Delete set segments greater than a nominated length.
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| GC96 | Select points between two DTM layers.Find those points above one DTM and below another, within the extent of both DTMs. For each point in the new selection set, the colour is modified, the group is set to the next group number and the report shows the point number, easting, northing, elevation and the elevation of the two DTMs. You can also select just one DTM.
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| GC99 | Create parallel sets at offsets.Create sets parallel to an alignment using a table of offsets. The points are created parallel to the main alignment of a selected roadjob at each xline within a chainage range. You can specify up to nine strings on each side. For each string you can specify the horizontal and vertical offset, name and colour. If the road job has a VAL, you have the option to add heights from the VAL. On each side, you can add rotate the strings about the HAL and VAL by specifying a slope alignment. The templates can be saved as project variables, or to a template .TEM file.
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| GCACTIVE | List registered horizontal alignments and select the active alignment or current road job.List alignments registered in the HALMANAGER, by registered HAL number, registered alignment name, record number, number of alignment offsets and record name. If there are any road jobs, you have the option to list the registered HAL number, registered alignment name , record number, number of alignment offsets and road job name of only alignments used in roadjobs. The current road job is marked with a *. The highlighted alignment is the active alignment in the current roadjob, if previously set. Once you have selected a registered horizontal alignment from the list, you have buttons to:
See also GCHALOFF to create a new pline alignment then make that active.
See also ACTIVE, where you need to know the current record number of the alignment, or to switch to the plan view then find the record graphically.
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| GCADDLAY | Prefix name with first four characters of layer name.Change the name of selected objects to the first four characters of the layer name followed by the original object name.
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| GCADJANT | Adjust points for a non-vertical antenna.Adjust points that have been computed at a fixed height vertically below a target or receiver on a pole, when the pole was actually perpendicular to the surface. Use GCADJANT to correct points collected by a GPS mounted on a vehicle when the height of the antenna above the surface was not allowed for during GPS installation. For each point, the true antenna location is determined at the antenna height above the point. By projecting the antenna length from the true antenna location in a direction normal to the average slope of triangles touching the point, a new point is created uphill from the first point, optionally on a new layer.
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| GCADJDES | Adjust points for new vertical alignment.Modify the elevations of selected points, by the difference between an old VAL and a new VAL. Use this to update a design model derived from strings or a DTM, rather than templates
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| GCANG | Report and label angle-right between locations.Report the angle-right given locations for backsight, instrument and foresight. Optionally, label the angle with default text style.
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| GCARC | Draw a pline or set arc from any three parameters.Chose one of 10 Types of arc, for example "Start, Centre, End" or "3 Point". ARC defaults to the last Type used. Similar to ARC, except you can specify whether to create a pline or set. The arc is drawn from the first point to the last point. If a radius is used, a negative radius will draw the arc on the right-hand side.
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| GCARCBL | Create breaklines along the arc segments of all sets on a designated DTM layer.Create points at regular intervals along the arc and connect a set from the existing first TP to each of the new points and finally to the end TP of the arc. The number of chords created is based on a specified maximum middle ordinate (arc-to-chord tolerance) value which indicates the maximum allowable deviation from the true arc for any breakline chord. The chords may be created invisibly. The selected tolerance and invisibility become the defaults for this project. The elevation of each point is interpolated along the arc from the elevations of the points at the arc TPs. If either TP has an undefined elevation, Breaklines will not be formed along that arc, and a warning message will be issued in the message area. Any objects named SETARCBL are deleted, then the new points and sets are named SETARCBL, and given the current colour, so they can be selected separately from the arcs. The cut and fill slope values of the chords match the values of the arcs. If slope values have not been edited, the current default slopes from DESIGNSET are used as normal. See also ARCBREAK which replaces the old arcs, ARCBL which does not allow for invisible chords, GCDTMALL which is equivalent to GCARCBL then DTMALL and BLFILTER which filters out excess breakline points.
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| GCBADEAT | Delete or select text objects containing Bad Rec EAT codes.Select or delete text records that contain Extended Attribute Text with Bad Record codes. Bad records occur then the EAT code refers to an object by number that no longer exists.
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| GCBLKPTS | Create points at insertion point of blocks.Create points at the insertion points of selected 3D blocks, on a specified layer. You have options to include 2D blocks, and to delete the blocks.
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| GCBOUND | Match extents of boundariesFor each of two DTM edges, copy the points from the other set which are outside the selected set on to the layer of the selected set, then create a new DTM edge. The result is two new sets covering the same maximum horizontal extent of the two sets, but with different layers and elevations. The areas and volumes between the new surfaces are shown in the message scroll area. Use this to compute volumes between two surfaces where the model is assumed to batter from the extent of one DTM to the other.
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| GCCHRLIN | Import profile from file of chainage and elevation.The input file needs to be comma-delimited in this format: chainage,elevation
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| GCCL | Create PPS Tunnelling System CL file.Create CL file for PPS Tunneling system from HAL, VAL, Xlines, and chainage range.
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| GCCLIP | Create new DTM surfaces clipped at boundaries.Use closed pline boundaries to create new surfaces from an existing surface, either inside or outside each polygon. The pline is also draped on the existing surface, the points and sets created are added to each new surface. This command prepares surfaces for 3d and 4d modelling applications.
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| GCCOLCON | Modify colours of positive, zero, and negative objects.Modify the colours of selected objects according to three elevation ranges: negative, zero and positive. GCCOLCON easily modifies the colour of labeled isopachs to show cut and fill. 2D objects are not modified. Use HDMS, TVLITE or COLOURCON if you need to define more colour bands.
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| GCCONCHK | Change elevation of 2D points to match all other points in the set.Used for fixing up supplied contour data.
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| GCCONIN | Import a Geocomp contour (.CON) file.
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| GCCONOUT | Export a Geocomp contour (.CON) file.
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| GCCONTXT | Set elevations of labelled contours.Find contours on selected layer near selected text, and change the elevation of the contour pline to match the value of the text. The text is considered near if the insertion point is within the specified tolerance of the ends of a pline, or within a tolerance equal to the height of the text from the nearest location on the pline. Convert the plines to sets, and you have created an approximate DTM surface from a labelled 2D contour plan. If the tolerance is too small, some contours will be missed. If you have only labels on index contours, and the tolerance is too large, some unlabelled contours will be assigned elevations. By default, plines with elevations already are not changed. To force a change, tick "Do all". Text containing non-numeric characters will be ignored. If there are insufficient labels, the other contour elevations can be set manually using GCMULCON, GCONECON or PLTO3D. If there is a DTM, you could interpolate the contour elevations using ELVPLINE or regenerate the contours.
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| GCCONVRT | Convert sets to plines and plines to sets.Unlike CONVERT, GCCONVRT retains all attributes and is much faster with large data sets. If all points in a set have the same elevation, the pline is assigned that elevation, otherwise the pline is assigned no elevation (= *). Zero length plines are converted to points. GCCONVRT does not remove duplicate points. If you choose to delete the original sets, you can choose to delete the points in those sets. GCCONVERT converts hidden and visible set segments. The new objects may have the original or current layer name, and a prefix.
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| GCCOORD | Coordinate transformation of points, plines, blocks and text.Use either seven-parameter transformation, or where possible, the faster and more accurate NTv2 distortion grid method. The principles and operation are described in detail in Terramodel 10 User's Guide Chapter 13: Using Coordcon. See also our Nav notes for more background and examples of how to create, set up and use coordinate systems. GCCOORD as supplied by Geocomp Systems transforms is similar to COORDCON except that, as well as points, GCCOORD also converts sets, plines, blocks and text. GCCOORD also adds Australian and New Zealand Coordinate Systems. GCLLGRID draws Latitude and Longitude grids and labels using GCCOORD settings. LLTABLE draws a table of coordinates including Latitudes and Longitudes. GeoCalc transforms files of points, whereas GCCOORD transforms points in Terramodel projects. GCCOORD requires COGO module. Both COORDCON and GCCOORD use the same COORDSYS, DATUMS and ELIPSOID data files in the \Shared\Mentor.dir. If you are converting between foot and metre coordinate systems, use MEASUNIT to set the project metric conversion factor for International foot (0.3048) or US Survey foot (0.304800609601). CSMAN and GEOSYS are part of a completely separate Coordinate System Manager for Trimble devices.
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| GCCOPY | Copy selected objects onto a selected layer, while retaining properties.This is better than COPY if you are not moving the data, as COPY changes some properties such as colour to match the new layer. Ideal for creating a single layer DTM from objects on multiple layers. You have the option of selecting objects by layer list. Colour, linetype, reference, group, visibility, hidden segments, etc., are retained. If an object has colour = 0 (which means colour By Layer), you choose whether to retain colour = 0, or changed the colour of the layer from which the object is copied. If points in a set are not selected with the set, the points are created on the new layer. See also GCDTM and MultilayerDTM.
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| GCCSVIN | Import and string comma-delimited ASCII (.csv) coordinate data.Import CSV data in a common format used by GPS and other data loggers. The data format is assumed to be Point,x,y,z,Description or Point,y,x,z,Descripton. Additional fields may be used for layers. Choose the Easting/Northing order. If you select a Geocomp Entity file, and your point names (descriptions) have been coded with corresponding feature and string codes, the points will be strung automatically. See GCIMPORT. If you don't select an ENT file during import, you can string later with AUTODRAFT. You can change colours and linetypes according to a CLT mapping file. See GC16. You can place blocks or symbols using a MAP file. See GC09 and GCINSBLK. You can derive the point Name from the Description using Long or Short Names from the ENT file, or retain the original Description. Choose whether to place the points on the Current Layer or on Separate Layers. If there are six or more fields in the CSV file, you will be prompted whether to "Use additional fields for Point's Layer". If you answer Yes, the sixth field will be used for the Layer. If you answer No and you have selected Separate Layers, both the Name and the Layer of each point will be combined from the Description and subsequent fields. Select Original Point Numbers to use the first field, otherwise case let GCCSVIN assign new point numbers, for example if the first field has duplicates or blanks. You can import other commas-separated coordinate files using commands such as GCPTSIN and IMPORT ASCII Points.
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| GCDAMVOL | Compute dam volumes.Specify a DTM, a high water level, a low water level, a vertical increment and at least one boundary. Select Water Vols for the volume of water in a depression, or Earth Vols for the volume of material in the wall. The report shows, for each boundary, the incremental and cumulative volumes as limited by the DTM surface and the high and low water levels. **** indicates that the area is not changing. You can graph these values in a spreadsheet program.
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| GCDCOUT | Export cross sections at intersecting sets to DC file.Create a roading .DC file from HAL/VAL or roadway from cross sections where Xlines intersect selected 3D sets. This is useful with Trimble machine control, especially where your data is supplied as strings or if needs cleaning up in Terramodel. See also GCMULTDC and IMPORT Roading DC files.
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| GCDELSET | Delete sets and points in sets.Delete selected sets including attached points, without having to select the points.
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| GCDIMLOT | Label lots with dimensions.Label multiple closed sets with bearings and distances on the current layer. The labels are EAT text attached to the points, so the dimensions update as you move the points. The text is created on the current layer, at the current plan view scale, with the nominated colour and text style. You can therefore create multiple dimension text layers at different scales for use with different dynaview layerlists. The lot with the largest area can be dimensioned as a surround lot. The length suffix is selected from the list defined in UNITSSET Labelling. See also GCLABLOT and LABELSEG.
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| GCDTM | Relayer objects into a DTM layer using a .DTP file.Set groups first by GCIMPORT. Digital Terrain Parameter (.DTP) files are created by Geocomp during DTM formation.
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| GCDTMALL | Create arc breaklines, relink all DTM layers and refresh.For every layer that has at least three 3D contourable points, create arc breaklines, relink the DTM then refresh the display. The arc breakline points and sets are created in the DTM layer using the current point and line colours. The arc-to-chord tolerance and visibility of the chords are as previously set by GCARCBL. See also DTMALL and DTMUPDT which do not change arc breaklines. DTMUPDT just updates one layer.
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| GCDTMGDE | Interpolate superelevation profiles from DTM.See also SUPERPLOT, CHEKROAD, GCSUBGDE.
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| GCDTMDIF | Report elevation differences between three DTMs at cursor.Report the interpolated elevation and elevation differences between up to three selected DTM layers at the cursor location to the message scroll area.
See also COORDS which enables the coordinate scroll including the elevation of the current DTM layer.
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| GCDTMIN | Import a Geocomp .DTM file onto a layer.A Geocomp Digital Terrain Model (.DTM) is a self-contained file of coordinates, triangles and breaklines, from which Geocomp can extract contours and sections and compute volumes. Creates a set from each triangle in the DTM file. The sets are created with a group of 1037 on a single nominated layer. The breaklines and boundary are included in the triangle edges.
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| GCDTMOUT | Export a layer as a Geocomp .DTM file.Create a Geocomp Digital Terrain Model (.DTM) from a DTM layer. To export the whole DTM, do not select a boundary. To clip the .DTM at an arbitrary pline boundary, you will need SiteDesign module. The maximum number of DTM points in Geocomp 9 is 32,767 points and in Geocomp 10 is 99,999 points. Triangles inside dead areas are ignored.
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| GCEARTH | Roadway volume report in columns.Similar to EARTHWRK and XVOLUMES except the report is laid out in columns. See also AVGEND. If you get zero volumes when you expect sensible values, see FIXLAYERS.
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| GCEDTATB | Edit feature attributes.Edit or create feature attributes of an object. Edit or create attributes of a selected parent object using a dialog. Feature attributes can be defined with a Name, Value and Date/Time usingh the attribute definition file FEATURES.ADF. You can also copy feature attributes from the parent object to multiple selected objects.
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| GCELEV | Modify the elevation of selected objects.Modify the elevation of selected objects to an absolute elevation or relative to the current elevation of the object.
Use the radio buttons to select Absolute or Relative. Turn 3D points into 2D points by entering an asterisk (*) as the elevation. GCELEV is similar to ELEVATION but with a clearer dialog. See also GC69 , GC53, GCNOELEV and CUTFILL.
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| GCESRIIN | Import ESRI ArcInfo ARC DEM grid files.Import ESRI ArcInfo ARC Digital Elevation Model grid files. ESRI DEM files are gridded elevation models such as those from LIDAR and Shuttle Radar Topographic Mission CGIAR-CSI. The ESRI DEM format defines the grid extent with a heading followed by the elevation values like this: ncols 1100 nrows 1100 xllcorner 520950.0 yllcorner 5257950.0 cellsize 1.0 NODATA_value -9999 30.02 29.99 29.95 29.9 etc You can limit the imported points to those inside a boundary pline. You can also define a corridor by specifying a maximum offset from a pline. See also GCNEDIN for similar Quantm DEMs. For ESRI Shape (SHP) files use the ESRI (SHP) IMPORT script. For US Geological Survey DEM files use the USGS (dem) IMPORT script. For x,y,z,intensity LIDAR data try LIDARIN or LIDARGRD.
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| GCEXPLOD | Explode blocks, text, plines and tables, onto their layers while retaining elevations and names of the original objects.Explode selected blocks into the contained blocks, plines or text, EAT text into plain text, plain text into plines, complex plines into segments and tables into text and plines, with the same layers as the exploded objects, while retaining the same names and elevations as the original objects. Optionally, delete the old blocks or text. Optionally, convert the exploded plines to sets. GCEXPLOD may be aliased to GCEXPLODE. If the block or text object has an elevation, the exploded pline retains the elevation. If a block is attached to a point, the elevation of that point is used. Objects in Terramodel blocks do not contain layer or point information. Even if you create a block from sets on multiple layers, you will have plines on the one layer when you explode it. Blocks are exploded into the component plines, text and blocks. Because blocks can be nested inside blocks, you may need to explode more blocks. Do not create recursive blocks that contain a block with same name. Text containing EAT codes is exploded into ordinary text. Ordinary text is exploded into plines. Text linked to points, such as dimensions, loses those links. Sets and plines with complex linetypes are exploded into plines and symbol text. Solid lines are unaffected. See also EXPLODE which may be aliased to GCEXPLOD. EXPLODE explodes all selected blocks, text and complex linetypes onto the current layer, not the layers of the selected objects. EXPLODE explodes a label table created by LABELTABLE, whereas GCEXPLOD does not. To separate pline or set segments, see DISJOIN.
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| GCFALL | Create a pline indicating fall from a location.Create a pline showing the path of maximum slope down a DTM from a starting location. This approximates the path a liquid such as water might take. The pline stops when it reaches the edge of the specified DTM, the bottom of a hole or the specified total length. The pline is created on the current layer in the current line colour with the selected linetype. Select a suitable linetype that indicates forward direction, such as 142 or TYRE_TRACK_>>>>, and a suitable plan view scale so you can see the symbols in the linetype. To create a set along the same path, use DRAPE afterwards. You can create paths from multiple locations before selecting Cancel to complete the command. At flat spots or ridges with multiple possible paths, only one branch is created. See also Hydrology module, LABGRADE, MG1, LINKSET and WALK.
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| GCFILTER | Filter excess points from straights and arcs 2D sets.Filters sets in 2D by offset and radius tolerances. Multiple arcs with common centres are also filtered. GCFILTER is excellent for reducing the size of background maps to be uploaded to instruments. See also BLFILTER, SETFILT and FILTER.
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| GCGENGRD | Create points on a grid pattern.Create points at nominated origin, interval, bearing and number within a boundary on a layer. See also DTMGRID, GRIDEXPT, GRDPTS, GRIDELEV, GCLABGRD and GRIDMAKE.
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| GCGPXIN | Import GPX GPS data.Import points from a GPX file and transform from lat/long coordinates to a specified coordinate system. You can limit to point inside a boundary or close to an alignment. See also GPXOUT.
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| GCGRDVOL | Compute the cut and fill volumes of selected grid cells.The volumes are reported and text showing the values is created in each cell. The volumes are based on the surface triangles, not just the grid.
Place labels on different layers, so they can be selected and displayed easily. Use vertical justification in the text styles to prevent overwriting. Because cells can be any shape, and do not need to be generated by this command, the cells could be stockpile boundaries, for example. See also EARTHWORK See also GRIDVOL which is much the same except it does not have the settings button and the xlines option. See also GC20 which gives a detailed report of volumes within multiple boundaries. See also MASSHAUL to create a mass haul diagram.
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| GCGSIOUT | Export alignment in Leica RoadPlus GSI format.Choose from HAL and VAL or Roadjob. See also GSIDTMOU and GCPTSOUT.
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| GCGT7IN | Import alignment in Topcon/Civilcad GC7/GTS format.Import horizontal alignment into the plan view, the vertical alignment into the profile view and the cross sections into the plan view. The cross section points are strung according to descriptions in the cross section file. The file names are assumed to have .GT7 file extension, and have the same name except for "- H", "- V" and "- XS" prefixes. See also GCGTSOUT.
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| GCGTSOUT | Export alignment in Topcon/Civilcad GTS format.Export horizontal and vertical alignment, and cross sections extracted at xlines, to separate files. See also GCGT7IN.
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| GCHALADJ | Adjust a registered HAL to use offsets.Adjust a registered HAL to use offsets from the nominated main HAL instead of the current alignment record. Offsets are computed at the nominated interval so the adjusted alignment will initially follow approximately same path, but the adjusted alignment will now follow any edits to the main registered alignment.
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| GCHALDEL | Delete selected registered HALs.Remove selected registered horizontal alignments from the HAL Manager. The plines are not deleted.
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| GCHALEDT | Edit a registered horizontal alignment graphically.Edit the main horizontal alignment of a selected roadway graphically. You can select, delete or insert IPs and change the arc radius, spiral in (back) and spiral out (ahead) lengths. You can also report the offsets from the design alignment to an as-built set record.
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| GCHALIN | Import Geocomp horizontal alignment (.HAL).The HAL file is imported as a pline in the plan view. Use GCIMPORT if you want the SDS data with the HAL. See also GCHALOUT and GCHVERIN.
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| GCHALOFF | Create a pline HAL from a registered horizontal alignment with offsets.A pline is created along a registered alignment defined by offsets in the horizontal alignment manager. The IPs are created at the chainage interval in the Settings. A report is displayed showing each chainage, offset, easting and northing of each IP. See also GCVALOFF and VARIOFF.
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| GCHALOUT | Export Geocomp horizontal alignment (.HAL).Converts a pline HAL in the plan view consisting of straights, arcs or spirals, but not splines. The output file name must be six-digits with extension .HAL, for Geocomp to read it. To extract sections other than to edge of model at 10m intervals, change the interval and offsets in SDS 84. See also GCHALIN and GCVEROUT.
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| GCHAULMN | Add Masshaul Import and Export materials from a CSV file.Add a MASSIMPORT table of import or export material for MASSHAUL.
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| GCHELP | Report Geocomp Update versionReport Geocomp Update details. Report
There are also buttons to link to various help and document files. See also ABOUT, SYSTEM, TSP and GC64BIT.
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| GCIDCHN | Display chainage and offset from a selected active alignment in multiple views.Select a pline or set in the plan view and a location in plan, profile, xsect or super view. The pline or set is made the active alignment and the location of the cursor is displayed in all the views. Click on Recentre Views to recentre open views at the current location. If Update XSect view is selected, the cross section of the nearest xline is made the active chainage. See also IDSTATION and SUPERVIS.
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
GCIMPORT
![]() |
Import Geocomp Points (.PTS) and (Strings (.STR) or use the Geocomp Data Collector Interface to import survey data.OverviewGCIMPORT is installed with Terramodel supplied from Geocomp Systems. GCIMPORT can be launched using a Geocomp button on the toolbar or by typing GCIMPORT. Using the Geocomp Data Collector Interface, raw data in a number of different data collector formats can be downloaded, converted to a Geocomp Standard Field File (.FLD), converted to Geocomp Points (.PTS) and (Strings (.STR) and then imported into Terramodel, with coding, stringing and symbols all automatically applied. The Geocomp Data Collector Interface is being phased out because, in most cases, the raw data files (including FLD files) can be better imported using the Field Data Module. Geocomp SDS format records the computed coordinates in a .PTS file and the feature code and stringing in a matching .STR file. The resulting 3D points are assigned block or symbol, layer, name and group according to the feature code. They are strung where required with sets of configurable layer, colour and linetype. Blocks representing tree canopies can be sized by the recorded radius. See also the Geocomp import-related TMLs GC09, GCHALIN, GCVERIN, GCCONIN, GCDTMIN, GCPLTIN, GCPLFIN, GCCSVIN, GCINSBLK, GCJOINMP, GCJOINPT, PTJOIN and IMPORTGC.
The IMPORT .PTS/.STR dialogSelect "Import .Pts/.Str" button and browse to select a GEOCOMP .PTS file. If other files, such as STR (Strings), ANT (Annotations), DMN (Dimensions), LTO (Lots), HAL (Horizontal Alignments) or VER (Vertical Alignments) with the same name as the PTS file are in the same folder, they will also be imported. This dialog also allows for selection of the ENT table. This table controls the layer names, descriptions/names, colours, linetypes and symbols according to the Geocomp entity number. If the Geocomp files have been derived from survey, the entity and stringing have been worked out from the feature coding. The layer name can be the short description, long description or moss string code in the ENT file. The entity number may be added to the front of the layer name. The record name (sometimes called description) is derived from the Geocomp string description, the short name (alpha-code), the long name or the moss (point or string) code in the ENT file. The Group is derived from the Geocomp Entity. Points are initially placed in layer 0. As the strings are imported, the points are relayered to the same layer as their sets. Points with no strings remain in layer 0. If "Copy Points into different layers if Point is in different Entities" is enabled, points used by more than one entity will be copied into each layer. Otherwise, the point will be placed only in the layer of the entity of the last string attached to that point. If "Map Points and Circles with Blocks or Symbols" is selected, blocks or symbols are automatically placed by group. The heading of Geocomp.MAP describes the format of the mapping file. See GC09 and GCINSBLK. A Geocomp plot parameter file can be used to control text attributes when importing DMN (Dimensions) and ANT (Annotations). The colour of the points and sets is derived from the GEOCOMP.CLT file in the Terramodel Search Path. If the entity is not in GEOCOMP.CLT, the colours are derived from the colours of the existing layer. If the layer does not exist, it is created, and the colours of the new layer and objects come from the default layer. (See also GC16 which uses the CLT to set the colours without importing the objects). Configuring the Data Collector InterfaceThe Geocomp Data Collector Interface is a DOS application called from Terramodel for Windows XP. It will not run on Window Vista or 7. Geocomp users will pick it up quickly. For everyone else, we recommend the Field Data Module which uses IMPORT Scripts, RDE and AUTODRAFT. The Geocomp Update adds scripts for even more formats, including formats that are commonly used in Australia. Sufficient environment space and free conventional memory must be made available. ANSI must be loaded to download from any instrument other than a Geodimeter. See www.geocomp.com.au/support/geocomp/ansi.html . The default location for these interface files is C:\Program Files\Trimble\Shared\Geocomp.
If the software is
installed anywhere else, you will need to edit the TM.BAT and
the GEOCOMP.PAR files. Contact You also need to select your data collector type, communication parameters and coding character positions. See the Geocomp manuals for an explanation of these settings.
Downloading from the Data Collector or Instrument to Terramodel
Uploading from Terramodel to the Data Collector or Total Station using the Geocomp Data Collector Interface
Uploading from Terramodel to the Data Collector or Total Station using other uploading software such as Geodimeter Survey Tools or SokkiaComms.
Communication between the Trimble Active Control Unit (ACU) or TSCE and Terramodel.Refer to http://www.geocomp.com.au/support/terramodel/acu.html.
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| GCINCTXT | Create text from incrementing numbers.Create text records at selected locations with values starting at a specified real number and increasing by a specified increment. Great for house numbers. You can set a prefix, suffix, current text style, direction and number of decimal places. You can copy the style, including border style, from a sample text object you first create or edit using TEXT command. See also INCRTEXT, RENUMLOT, LABELSETS, GCLABLOT and LOTJOIN.
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| GCINSBLK | Replace circles with treesPlace a symbol or block for each selected circular set, scaled to match the diameter. The most common use is to place large numbers of tree blocks scaled to fit canopy or trunk diameters. Delete the original circles if you want. For a few circles, UNITBLK or BLOCK Insert may be better. If the circles are plines, CONVERT to a set first, then set the group with GC52 or SGRP. The block is chosen according to the group of the set, and a mapping file. This is the same mapping file used by GCIMPORT and GC09. See Geocomp.map for an example which includes an explanation of the format. GCIMPORT can import survey data including circles. If you elect not to "Map points and Circles with Blocks or Symbols" at the time, you can use GCINSBLK to replace the circles later. Use GC09 to place blocks or symbols on points by group. To create points at centroids of sets or plines, use GC35. See also LABELSETS. Tree canopy blocks included with Terramodel include: Tree1 to Tree8, Tree coniferous type 1, Tree deciduous type 1 to 3, GCSYM423, 437, 438, 452 and 453. Symbols 100 to 109 are provided as both symbols and blocks SYM100 to SYM109. Some of these are illustrated in the Terramodel 10.1 User Guide pages 171 and 200.
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| GCJOINMP | Join points with gapsCreate sets on the current layer between selected points. Join to nearest point starting from the west, or in point number order with option to only join consecutive points.
Leaves gaps where distance is greater than a specified maximum distance.
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| GCJOINPT | Create sets from points by feature and string in name.Create sets by joining points according to the feature code and string data in the name following the conventions of Geocomp software. Join selected points with sets according to feature codes defined by sequential characters starting from the beginning of each name and immediately after any point code separator characters. The characters from the entity start position to the entity end position are treated as the feature code. The characters from the string start position to the string end position are treated as the string number. Points and sets can be separated into layers or placed on the current layer. If you specify a Geocomp ENT file, integer feature codes are matched against the entity field in the first column, and other feature codes are matched against the short description in the second column. Colours and linetypes are determined by the layer settings, unless you specify an colour and linetype file (CLT) file (see GC16). Blocks and symbols can be placed according to a MAP file (see GC09). You can specify that the layer name is derived from the long description in column 7 of the ENT file. GCJOINPT has been replaced by AUTODRAFT where a Feature Code is called a Field Code, a String Number is called a Feature Instance ID, points with Lines are strung even when the string number is blank, and the ENT, CLT and MAP files have been replaced by the ADC file. See also GCIMPORT, PTJOIN, GCJOINMP and GCCSVIN.
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| GCKMLIN | Import points from Google Earth (KML).Import placemarks and paths from a Google Earth KML file within a selected boundary pline or within a maximum offset of a pline HAL. The WGS84 latitude and longitude coordinates in the KML are transformed into eastings and northings in the coordinate system you select from a list defined by GCCOORD or COORDCON. To extract a KML file from a KMZ, simply unzip using a utility like WinZip. To import an image saved in Google Earth, use Terramodel IMAGE Manager.
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| GCKMLOUT | Link to Google Earth, NearMap or HyperTiles.Display aerial or satellite images of the selected location in Google Earth, NearMap or HyperTiles. Google Earth (GE)Export selected points, sets and plines, launch Google Earth (if installed) then display the points and lines on the Google Earth model. Specify whether to label points with the point number or point name or both. Exported points are lines are given the same colours as displayed in Terramodel at the time. There are Settings for "Absolute Elevation", "Extrude", "Text Scale" and "Line width". In Google Earth, you can save the current image by selecting File, Save then Save Image, then manually register the image using Terramodel IMAGE Manager. Any changes you make to rotation, tilt, colour, style or visibility will appear in the saved image. NearMap (NM)Select "NM" to display an orthorectified image in NearMap with your default internet browser at the extents of the selected pline or set. The pline or set is not displayed. HyperTiles (HT)Select "HT" to open HyperTiles (if installed) then display orthorectified images at the polygon defined by the selected set or pline. To save the images from HyperTiles:
HyperTiles saves files in a folder of the specified Name under the specified path including a .JPG file and .JGW file for each tile. In Terramodel IMAGE Manager, add selected .JPG files to register them at the locations specified in the corresponding .JGW files. You can select multiple .JPG files at once. If the list of coordinate systems in HyperTiles does not include your Coordinate System in Terramodel, use GCCOORD to transform a copy of your data to one that is listed. Notes
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| GCLABGRD | Label and draw grid in polygons.Create a north-south/east-west grid of plines, labels, or both, within multiple bounding plotboxes of any shape. Select a layer for the grid lines, or select No Grid. The grid can be lines, ticks or dots (short plines) Select a layer for the labels, or layer 0 for no labels. Select easting and northing intervals. If you are labelling, select text styles and whether to label inside or outside the plotbox. You can also prefix and suffix the labels and control the number of spaces from the border. The initial default suffix is derived from the plan view settings. Gridlines can cross a polygon up to 20 times. LABELGRID is simpler but only allows for simple rectangular plot boxes, unlike those often created by PLANSET. You can also make a pline grid with GRIDMAKE or PLANSET. To make a grid of points, see GCGENGRD, GRIDMAKE and GRIDELEV.
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| GCLABIP | Label intersection points.Label all intersection points on selected HAL, with IP Chainage, and optionally Delta, Easting and Northing. Chainages are labelled with "Ch". The text is placed legibly and perpendicular to the HAL at an offset which you can enter or select graphically. See also LABELPI, LABELHAL and GC27.
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| GCLABLOT | Label closed sets with lot area and lot number text.Label selected closed sets with EAT text showing the lot numbers and lot area. The lot numbers are derived from the set names. The areas up to 10,000 square units are labelled as m². Alternative areas above 10,000 square units are divided by 10,000 and labelled as Ha. The precision of the basic and alternative areas is controlled by UNITSSET. If you want feet and acres or other area unit labels, or you don't want to use EAT text, use LABELSETS instead. You can use commands such as LABELSETS, LOTJOIN, NAME, QSET and RENUMLOT to set the lot numbers as set names. See also GCDIMLOT which labels dimensions using EAT text and GC80 which reports lot areas.
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| GCLABPEG | Label points in a set with pipeline peg labels.Create text labels at a specified offset from all points in a selected set, showing the word PEG followed by the point name and chainage. Tick boxes enable extra labels for delta angle (to minutes or seconds) and coordinates. Use PROJECTV to control the left/right direction.
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| GCLABPNT | Label multiple points with EAT text, leaderline and border.Label points with user-definable text labels at an offset perpendicular to a HAL on a specified layer with rounded rectangle borders and leader lines. Enter the text and text style in the Settings. The text can include EAT codes referring to the points. Use \n to indicate new lines of text. See also CALLOUT to label one point at a time with more options. For points on a HAL, you can create a temporary HAL to control the side on which to place the labels.
|
GCLINPTS | List points with invalid coordinates.List points with an undefined easting or northing or both. Points with only undefined elevations (2D points) are not listed. The report also lists the first available point number, the last point number and the maximum and minimum non-zero values for easting, northing or elevation, if any. Points with undefined coordinates are most commonly created when RDE cannot compute the coordinates from the available survey information. Such points, and sets connecting them, are not visible but are included in lists when selected by non-graphical means, such as by View or Point number range. See also GCNOELEV.
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| GCLFAOUT | Export Quantm linear features .LFAQuantm uses a linear_features.lfa file to define crossing requirements at linear features. The set name defines the linear feature description and the layer name defines the linear feature label. Sets must have all 3D points or all 2D points. If you have some 2D points in the set, assign elevations first, for example by DTMPTS or GC50. If a set has all 2D points, Quantm will interpolate from the DTM. Export special zones using GCSZAOUT. Export DTM data using GCTMAOUT.
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| GCLLGRID | Draw Latitude and Longitude grids and labels.Create labelled plines representing latitude and longitude according to the selected Coordinate System. Settings The settings provide control over the pline spacing and labelling.
To label grids in multiple boundaries, enter GCLLGRID M at the command line.
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| GCLNGIN | Import Geocomp long section .LNGImport long section as a pline in the profile view See also GCVERIN.
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| GCLOTCNR | Label lot corners with two elevationsLabel points in selected sets with a single text object showing elevations from both an existing DTM and a design DTM For each point, the text is oriented along the longest of the two connecting segments on the first lot tested.
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| GCLPTS | List the coordinates of selected points to report or CSV.Select Points then List. Select Options to include any permutation of Point Number, Record Number, Easting, Northing, Elevation, Name, Layer, Colour, View, Symbol Number, Group and General Information and whether to also export to a comma-separated CSV file. See also LPOINTS which does not include options for Group or CSV, LPTSRAD which also shows bearing and distance from a stand point and PORTSC1 which reports heights as depths.
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| GCMAPOUT | Assign unique layers for export to DXF.Relayer selected objects to new layer names with unique sequential numbers for each object or layer name and create a corresponding map file. To export object names longer than 16 characters to AutoCAD or similar via DXF into layers:
For object names up to 16 characters you could use NAME2LAY instead.
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| GCMATCH | Close gaps in contours.Create new contour segments across the gaps. Then JOIN to create contiguous contours. Use GCMATCH to match contours at sheet edges and cross gaps at labels. Also match sets within a tolerance. See also DTMMATCH which matches overlapping DTMs.
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| GCMATIN | Import a list of road materials.Add to or modify the materials in the the Road Material Manager MATERIALS. The list is exported by GCMATOUT to transfer materials from one project to another.
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| GCMATOUT | Export a list of road materials.Export a list of materials from the Road Material Manager MATERIALS. Each material has a name, shrink/swell factor, colour, and is classed as embankment, unsuitable or neither. Import into another project using GCMATIN.
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| GCMERGE | Merge multiple regions or DTMs.Create a final layer by merging multiple regions from layers in a sequential layer list. The objects on the Initial DTM layer are first copied to the Final DTM layer. Then, for each layer in a layer list in turn, objects in the Final DTM are clipped to boundaries on the listed layer then all the objects from the listed layer are copied into the Final DTM layer. Breaklines are also draped onto the Final DTM 2 mm inside the clipping boundaries. The process is repeated in alphabetical order for each layer in the layer list. The clipping boundaries are at the "Clip Dist" outside the region boundaries. Make the Clip Dist greater than 3 mm to reduce potential crossing breakline problems. Specify whether the region boundaries on each listed layer are defined by every closed set, or the DTM Edge. If DTM Edge is selected, boundaries are only created for layers which can form a valid DTM. GCMERGE can be used to merge multiple surveys or design components into big models. If you use GCMERGE to build an-end-of-month DTM, be careful with the spelling of layer names so the alphabetical order is also the data order. For example, EOM 09 20090822A. See also MERGE, GCMATCH and GC33.
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| GCMFI | Import multiple .PTS or CSV files.Import multiple ASCII coordinate files in common formats.
Lines with unexpected data, such as blank fields, letters or spaces, header lines, * for elevations on are skipped. Deep negative elevations are read as 2D. See also GCPTSIN, IMPORT, GCCSVIN and so on.
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| GCMULCON | Assign contour elevations to multiple 2D plines.To use GCMULCON:
GCMULCON correctly allows for the line to cross the same contour multiple times. This is similar to LABELCONTOURS, except the elevations are assigned rather than read. See also GCONECON, GCCONTXT, GCMATCH and PLTO3D.
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| GCMULTDC | Export sets to a Trimble Roading DC file.Create a roading .DC file of alignments for every selected 3D set. See also GCDCOUT and IMPORT Roading DC files.
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| GCMULTGD | Export multiple alignments to Geodimeter .rln files.Create one .RLN file for each set containing horizontal and vertical alignment only. Useful for uploading strings for setout. See also GCRLNOUT.
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| GCMULXML | Export multiple alignments to a Leica 1200 LandXML fileCreate an .xml file of alignments for every selected 3D set. See also GCXMLOUT and IMPORT LandXML files.
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| GCMULVOL | Compute cut/fill volumes between pairs of DTM surfaces.Compute cut and fill volumes within boundaries between DTM surfaces listed in a table. The volumes are computed between each sequential pair of DTM or depth surfaces. The selected boundary may represent mining "blocks". Optionally create CSV file.
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| GCNAMEPT | Name points sequentially along a set.Rename points along a set from a starting integer with optional prefix and suffix. See also GCRENUM.
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| GCNEDIN | Import Quantm grid data.Import Grid (NED) .asc data created by Quantm. GCESRIIN imports similar data files created by other applications. See also GCTMAIN.
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| GCNMEAIN | Import NMEA log data.Import NMEA strings from GPS receivers tagged as $GPGGA’.
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| GCNOELEV | Select all points with no elevation.Select all 2D points from selected points. 2D points have an elevation of *. Use the Previous selection to use these points in another command such as DTMPTS. GC69 turns points with elevation = 0 into 2D points with elevation = *. GC53 retains the elevation on the point but excludes the point from any DTM surface. GCLINPTS lists points with no easting or no northing.
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| GCOFFELV | Create plines or sets at a horizontal and vertical offset.Pick the set, offset, elevation difference and side. See also OFFELEV, GC99, OFFELEVM and SIDESLOPE.
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| GCOFLINE | Select all points in selected sets.Select all points in selected sets. Use the Previous selection to use these points in another command. This is similar to selecting points by Ofline in the Right Mouse Button menu, only GCOFLINE allows selection of multiple sets. See also BDYRELAY.
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| GCONECON | Assign elevations to selected contour plines.See also GCMULCON, GCCONTXT and PLTO3D.
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| GCOUT | Export data to Geocomp .PTS and .STR format.Geocomp SDS data consists of at least two files with the same name and certain file extensions. The name must be a six-digit integer for Geocomp to read them.
You can choose whether you want to explode blocks, linetypes or text. The maximum number of points or strings that Geocomp 9.x can read is approximately 32,000. For Geocomp 10.08 and 10.1, the maximum is approximately 132,000. Other Geocomp data types that can be exported include:
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| GCPAD | Place building pads at nominated elevation within a lot.Create a new set on the current layer, offset from the lot boundary by 0.005 with points at the specified elevation. Select a free location anywhere inside a lot. Define a standard offset and either a Relative or Absolute Elevation. If an existing set is already offset, then only the Elevation Relative or Absolute values need to be applied.
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| GCPAN | Pan by keypad with North = 8.Pan to the adjacent screen in the direction of the numeric keypad. As shown in the following table, type in GCPAN, a space and a numeric keypad button indicating the direction.
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| GCPANEL | Create concrete roadway batter panel set out points.Create points to setout concrete roadway panels given a panel alignment, start chainage, panel gap and hole edge distance.
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| GCPAVSET | Create a CSV file of pavement depths in a format suitable for use in Paveset paving machines.Specify a roadway, pavement depth, as-built layer, chainage range, offsets (in m) and export CSV file name. The CSV file includes at the specified offsets, for every xline, the chainage and the difference in mm between design elevations interpolated from the road design and as-built elevations interpolated from the as-built DTM layer. The optional report also shows the road name and description, layer depth, design elevation and as-built elevations. If elevations cannot be interpolated from both surfaces at any offset, the output files are deleted with a warning. You may need to use GC91 or similar to extend the surfaces beyond the as-built points to ensure that elevations can be interpolated. The xlines at the reported offsets should be at the as-built points. The specified chainage range should not exceed the as-built surface.
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| GCPILE | Create pile points along an alignment.Create points for each pile given alignments, chainage range, spacing, offsets, elevation and pile numbers.
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| GCPLDICE | Create plines for line marking.Create new plines on the current layer, along selected plines, with a nominated line length and gap. To add "thickness", use GC71. If the plines to be selected include splines or spirals, use FILTER on a copy first.
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| GCPLFIN | Import HP-GL or HP-GL/2 (.PLF, .HPG, .GL2, .PLT, .000) plot file into sheet view.Import and edit plot files in HP-GL and HP-GL/2 format then plot to any Windows plotter. This is useful when your Windows plotter doesn't support HP-GL or HP-GL/2/2, but you have a HP-GL or HP-GL/2 plot file from Geocomp or other software. Supported plotter commands include:
These commands make up the bulk of HP-GL and HP-GL/2 plot files which have not been polyline-encoded. PE commands produced by applications including Terramodel are ignored. PC and PW commands are ignored. Instead specify colour mapping during import. Use the Terramodel pen carousel to define the pen thickness and colour for each pen. The plot is placed in the current layer in the sheet view in at the specified location. Dimensions are in sheet units. Text labels use TMODELF font. You can change these after import using TEXTMETRICS. Notes for PDF2CAD users:
Notes for Geocomp users:
To use Terramodel as a Windows plotter for Geocomp:
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| GCPLTIN | Import Geocomp .PLT plot file into sheet view.The Geocomp PLT file format is unique to Geocomp. The font, character height, character width, label origin, orientation and slant are set in the PLT using the entity definition in the Geocomp plot parameter file. You can modify text by commands including TEXTMETRICS, TEXTSCALE, TEXTALIGN, TEXTCASE, TEXTFIT and ALIGNTXT.
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| GCPRFEDT | Edit profile IPs graphically.Edit an Intersection Point from a vertical alignment profile in the profile view. Choose an editing mode such as Drag. You can set maximum, minimum and increment for grades and whether to display. See also CURVE to edit the curve details at an IP and RDVALEDIT to use design speed criteria.
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| GCPROFIL | Create profiles from multiple DTMs in a layerlist.Create profiles along multiple HALs interpolated from DTMs in a layer list. Each profile is created in the profile view referenced to its HAL. The pline colour is derived from the DTM layer colour, the linetype from the DTM linetype and both the name and layer name from the DTM layer name. The pline vertices are created at the DTM break points. The profiles are broken at the edge of the DTM and within dead areas. You can delete profiles previously created from the same HALs. See also PROFILE and QPROFILE which use layer masks.
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| GCPTAIN | Import data from TPSetout/TPStakeout .PTA survey point file.See also TPSETOUT for exporting to TPSetout and TPSTKOUT for exporting to TPStakeout.
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| GCPTDIST | Check minimum distances between points on sets.Report record number, layer name and point numbers for each segment. Indicates with **** whether any segment is less than a specified maximum distance. Report average distance between points for each set and overall. Use GCPTSDIST to prove that you have taken sufficient observations in surveys of linear features such as roads. Use GC68 to interpolate points at a minimum distance.
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| GCPTSIN | Import points from an ASCII file.Select from a range of coordinate survey formats. The formats include:
PTSIN imports only some of these formats. See also IMPORT which imports many formats, GCPTSOUT and PTSOUT.
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| GCPTSOUT | Output points to an ASCII file.Select from a range of coordinate survey point formats for uploading into survey instruments for setout.
The Job name field is currently only used with Sokkia formats. Some of the formats have been modified slightly compared with the similar PTSOUT, such as adopting Easting/Northing order. Points with undefined (*) easting or northing, are not exported. Points with undefined elevation (2D points), may be exported depending on the format. With some formats, you can choose whether to export the point number or the point name.
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| GCPTSTXT | Change elevation or name of points on layer by the nearest selected text within tolerance.Change the elevations or names of points imported from 2D CAD drawings where the points are labelled with text objects. Select the text objects, a points layer and a tolerance. Select whether to replace all elevations or names, or just those which don't already have elevations or names. Select whether to delete text objects for those points which have been changed. Select whether to replace the point elevations or the point names. Select whether the tolerance is to be measured from the points to the insertion points of the text or to the centroids of the text boxes. If you don't have points, use TEXT2PNT to create points at the insertion point of the text.
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| GCQA | Report chainage, offset and elevation difference to DTM.Compare points in a survey against a design DTM. The report shows the chainage, offset, design DTM elevation (=rl), point elevation (=fl) and elevation difference (dz) for each selected point. You have the option to ignore points outside the DTM extent and specify a stripping depth. The chainage and offset is computed relative to the active alignment. See also GC30.
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| GCQP | Interactive quick profile.Display a profile interpolated from a DTM layer between two locations in the Plan view. The second location can be dragged by mouse. In Shift mode, the first location is moved with it. In Rotate mode, the first location is fixed. The quick profile is displayed in the Xsect view, but no object is created. See also QPROFILE which is not interactive, but allows for multiple layers.
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| GCQV | Move a HAL IP and recompute roadway volume.Move a selected point of intersection along a horizontal alignment to a new location and calculate the resulting cut and fill roadway quantities. QV Options
Tips on using GCQV:
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
GCREDRAW
![]() |
Redraw all views and set scale for point labels.Redraw all view modes. If the current view is the Plan view, the plan view scale is also set so that point labels are a consistent, small but legible height. GCREDRAW is similar to the VIEWSCAL Default for Pt Labels button followed by REDRAW.
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| GCRENUM | Renumber points in set order.Sequentially renumber points in selected sets, starting at the highest point number in the project plus one. See also RENUM, RENUMBER, REVERSE and GCNAMEPT.
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| GCREPORT | Start a new report in P3Pad editor.Start a new report in P3Pad editor by clearing any current report or opening a new P3Pad report window. Any new report created by a Terramodel command, will replace any currently open report. To keep a report, select File from the P3Pad menu then Save As... Editor features include Text formatting, Print Preview, Find and Replace, Insert Date and Time and Embed or Insert objects such as images. The P3Pad report editor can be used to edit Terramodel reports, or write new text. The reports can be Saved and Opened in Text or Rich Text (RTF) formats. Use TXT format to reuse in software such as TEXT or TXTIN. Changes to page setup, typeface or font size for new reports take effect only after you restart the report editor. Use a font such as Courier New which is fixed width and displays m² correctly.
If you want to use a different editor, simply copy the text and paste into that other editor such as WORDPAD or NOTEPAD.
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| GCREVIEW | Move or copy objects from one view to another.The only attribute that is changed is the View mode. The coordinates are retained. The objects are removed from the original view, unless you do not "Delete Old". Examples
See also REVIEW which always deletes the objects from the original view.
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| GCRIVER | Interpolate elevations onto a digitised river.Where a 2D "river" crosses contour plines, points are created with the contour elevation. A set is then created along the river string with heights interpolated along the string. This improves the terrain model. For best results, remove flat triangles in link settings. See also GC50.
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| GCRLNOUT | Create Geodimeter Roadline3D Files from setsCross sections are created by intersecting sets at Xlines along the alignment. The HAL, VAL, "roadway templates", and "side templates" are exported to an .RLN file suitable for uploading to Geodimeter Program 39 using Geodimeter Software Tools or the Upload Script. Selecting "Use names" includes names in the .RLN file. Select "Limit 12 Pts" if uploading, as only 12 points can be uploaded for each side template. Alternatively, if the file is to be imported using the Import script for editing as a Terramodel Roadway, the limit is not required. The details of each computed point are reported. See also P39 and See also GCMULTGD.
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| GCSDROUT | Export alignment in Sokkia SDR format.Use a Roadjob, HAL/VAL or intersect 3D sets.
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| GCSKIPMN | Replace skip ranges by CSV or pline boxes.Replace skip ranges from skips defined in a CSV file or by pline boxes. Use GCSKIPMN when you have too many skip ranges to manage by manual editing with SKIP. You can add or replace skip ranges from a file which you have previously created in a spreadsheet application. You can also create pline boxes at the current skip ranges in both the plan and profile views, centred on the road alignment. After editing these boxes for position and range and updating the alignments, Create Skips from selected boxes. Options
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| GCSTRATA | Create points at strata from table of materials and depths.Create multiple points with the same coordinates as selected points, with layer names and elevations derived from a CSV file. To use GCSTRATA
For example, using this table, and selecting depths, for each point on layer B4, create a point on each of the six listed layers with the same easting and northing. The elevation of the new point on layer 1_topsoil is 0.1, on layer 2_alluvium is 0.3, etc. Layer, A, B1, B2, B3, B4, 1_topsoil, 0.2, 0.2, 0.2, 0.2, 0.1, 2_alluvium, 0.2, 0.2, 0.2, 2.5, 0.3, 3_colluvium, 0.2, 0.2, 0.2, 2.5, 0.5, 4_RS, 4.8, 2.3, 3.7, 4.7, 1.5, 5_XW, 12.8, 3.6, 12.8, 9.1, 4.1, 6_MW, 13.6, 20, 22.7, 20.1, 28, If the points are to be used for depth surfaces, select depths so the Z value is derived from the table. If for elevation surfaces, the value in the table is subtracted from the elevation of the original point.
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| GCSUBGDE | Create plines to transition to subgrade templates.See also CHEKROAD and GCDTMGDE.
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| GCSZAOUT | Export Quantm special zones .SZAQuantm allows you to specify zones that require special treatment such as cost and crossing requirements. Select zones by closed plines or sets (or blocks containing closed plines or sets) to export to the special_zones.sza file. The name of the pline or set (or subject of the block) defines the zone description. The layer name defines the zone label. Export linear features using GCLFAOUT. Export terrain data using GCTMAOUT.
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| GCTADPOL | Label batter with block showing direction of slope.User-definable "tadpole" blocks are placed between two sets representing tops and toes at the nominated spacing. Each block is placed so it points downhill from the higher set to the lower set. The sets can therefore swap direction between tops and toes at the transition between cut and fill. The block size increases with the horizontal distance. Blocks which exceed the maximum length are not placed. If you create your own "tadpole" block, place the insertion point at the uphill (south) end.
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| GCTMAIN | Import Quantm terrain data.Use this to verify your TMA file before submitting it to Quantm. Use MOSSIN to transfer proposed alignments from Quantm to Terramodel. See GCTMAOUT.
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| GCTMAOUT | Export Quantm terrain data.Create a .TMA file for submission to the Quantm route optimization for infrastructure service. The TMA file is a grid of points interpolated from a DTM within a boundary. Check your .TMA file by reimporting it using GCTMAIN. Export Special Zones using GCSZAOUT. Export Linear Features using GCLFAOUT.
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| GCTRACE | Define a region by tracing inside multiple selected plines or sets.Show the extent of the region within multiple plines or sets around a location by creating a new set, pline or hatching on the current layer or reporting the area. The Lot# entered becomes the name of the pline or set. To hatch, select a hatch pattern and scale. Select "Report area only" to avoid creating the pline or set. The Basic Area, Alt Area and accumulated Alt Area are shown in the message scroll according the MEASUNIT and UNITSSET settings. Gaps less than the maximum Snap Distance are crossed automatically. Any duplicate points can be removed from the new set. You can continue to select locations without leaving GCTRACE. Typical applications include reporting, bounding and shading areas (in any view) and creating closed figures from messy linework such as subdivision lots or volume boundaries. The hatch patterns can be selected from a list controlled by HATCHPAT. See also TRACEBDY which has a fixed maximum snap distance, LOTJOIN to create multiple sets from multiple centres, AUTOSET to create a clockwise set from points and QSET to quickly key in a lot boundary and hatching commands HATCHPAT, HATCHUSER and HATCHENC.
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| GCTSP | Add Geocomp Update to Terramodel Search Path.If you manually replace the Terramodel initialisation file tmodwin.ini with one from another computer where the Geocomp Update has not been installed, run GC64BIT from the command line to fix tmodwin.ini. If GC64BIT will not run, try typing GCTSP at the command line to add the ...\Terramodel\Geocomp folder to the Terramodel Search Path (TSP), restart Terramodel then try GC64BIT again. GCTSP.TML must be in the \Terramodel\TMLs folder so it can be found. GCTSP is aliased to GC64BIT so typing GCTSP at the command line will fix the the paths in tmodwin.ini files copied from 32-bit Windows, unless the Geocomp Update is not found, in which case GCTSP will add the Geocomp folder so you can then run GC64BIT.
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| GCTSTYLE | Set current text style.Usage: GCTSTYLE textstyle. For example, type GCTSTYLE seg_label to change the current text style to seg_label. Use in combination with toolbars, aliases or macros. For example, the following macro sets the current text style to tmodelf_50 then prompts for text: Start Macro gctstyle tmodelf_50 stext End Macro
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| GCTTAOUT | Export a set to Trimble .tta and .ttx.For newer Trimble instruments, replaced by EXPORT Trimble Roading 3D (DC) export using DC file, GCDCOUT or GCMULTDC.
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| GCTUNNEL | Export LandXML for Leica RoadRunner Tunnel.Export LandXML for Leica RoadRunner Tunnel. See also ROAD_RUN.
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| GCTURN | Compute swept path of vehicle.Create plines showing the swept path of a vehicle. Place vehicle outlines at intervals along the path. Store dimensions and layers for a single vehicle or a prime-mover and one or two trailers. For simple cases, GCTURN can be used in place of AutoTURN and AutoTrack.
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| GCMC3D |
Export files to Leica UMC 3D Machine Control.Export the centreline, coordinate, profile and triangle files required for any equipment fitted with current versions of Leica Geosystems Universal Machine Control 3D. Define an alignment using a road job, then select plines or sets to export as a GEO file or a selected DTM to export as an XML. Click on Create Files to be prompted for Arc-to-Chord tolerances and the LIN output file name. Then click OK to create the files.
Then load the files onto a current version of Leica UMC 3D Machine Control. See also POWERGDE, GRADESMT and DTM2XML.
| |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| GCUNJOIN | Break sets and plines into segments.This is different to EXPLODE, which explodes only sets and plines with complex linetypes. GCUNJOIN does not break plines containing curves. DISJOIN is aliased to GCUNJOIN. See also JOIN.
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| GCUPDATE | Part of the Geocomp Update.This file is required for TMLs issued with the Geocomp Update since Terramodel 10.60. It does not run by itself. If you get a GCUPDATE message, contact Geocomp Systems and advise the the complete message.
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| GCVALDEL | Delete selected registered VALs.
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| GCVALEDT | Move vertical alignment intersection point.See GCPRFEDT instead.
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| GCVALOFF | Create a pline VAL from a registered vertical alignment with offsets.A pline is created along a registered alignment defined by offsets in the vertical alignment manager. The vertical IPs are created at the chainage interval in the Settings. A report is displayed showing each chainage, vertical offset and elevation of each IP. See also GCHALOFF.
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| GCVERIN | Import Geocomp vertical alignment (.VER).The .VER file is imported as a pline in the profile view. Use GCIMPORT if you want the SDS data with the VER. See also GCLNGIN, GCHALIN and GCVEROUT.
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| GCVEROUT | Export Geocomp vertical alignment (.VER).Converts a pline in the profile view consisting of straights and parabolic curves. For circular curves, only the IP is converted. See also GCVERIN and GCHALOUT.
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| GCWRAP | Change tunnel wrap status of a layer.Changes wrap status of a DTM layer to "wrapped" or "unwrapped", without transforming the points. Use this when you have "unwrapped" data on a "wrapped" layer, or vice versa. See TUNNELDTM.
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| GCXLINES | Create or replace xlines with chainage labels on a roadway.Create or replace xlines along the horizontal alignment of a selected roadway with nominated offsets at nominated intervals on the nominated layer. You can add xlines at HAL points, VAL points and skips. Use the Settings to limit the chainage range or to label the xlines perpendicular to the alignment with chainages, HAL point labels and optionally road name. The initial default xlines layer is stored in a project variable. Once xlines have been created, the default xlines layer is the layer of the first xline on the alignment. If there are old xlines, they are deleted and you are prompted whether to reuse the extents of the existing xlines to clip the new xlines. If they are labelled you are prompted whether to delete the text labels. The default left and right extents also limit the extents of roadways in commands such as ROADSPOT and GC42AB. The message scroll reports the main alignment name and description for the current road and default xlines layer. See also RDXLINES to create xlines at single points, chainages or plines, GC39 to recreate xlines after moving intersection points and XLINES to create xlines without a roadway. See also GC27 to label xlines.
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| GCXMLIN | Import LandXML points within boundaries.Import points from a LandXML file that fall within a closed pline or within an offset from an open pline. See also LandXML IMPORT script and GCPTSIN.
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| GCXMLOUT | Export roadjob in LandXML format.Export roadjob strings at xlines in LandXML cross section format.
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| GDMDIR | List Geodimeter directory and delete files.List files on a Geodimeter data collector with option to delete. After requesting the Geodimeter instrument type and some communication parameters, open the Instrument Directory dialog box, which displays the Area and Job files that are currently stored in the Geodimeter instrument or data collector. You can use GDMDIR to:
To download Geodimeter survey files see, IMPORT. To edit, see GFE and RDE.
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| GEOC_PAL | Add GeoNav palettes.Modifies tmodwin.ini to include GeoNav and Geocomp64 Palettes and one-to-one64 colourmap.
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| GEOMINQ | Report distances measured values from objects.Report point numbers, bearing, slope distance and zenith angles along a segment or between two points.
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| GEOMRPTS | Report measured values from objects.Select objects and print a report of selected objects.
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| GEOSYS | Establish the GPS geodetic system.Use this to define your local grid before importing Trimble GPS Real-Time Kinetic (RTK) data to compute with RDE. Establish a geodetic system for the project to which any imported GPS (WGS84-based) data will be converted. This geodetic system cannot be modified after a point is created.
GEOSYS uses the Trimble Coordinate System Manager (CSMAN). COORDCON and GCCOORD use a different coordinate system library unrelated to GEOSYS.
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| GFE | Geodimeter File Editor.Edit Geodimeter format files including RAW, JOB, UDS, ARE, PTS and PCO. GFE column headings can be configured. For example, if GFE displays PTS with Easting\Northing, but the PTS file contains Northing\Easting, the data will appear to be incorrect when the GFE headings that are the real problem. GFE is part of Field Data Module, so no key is required. See also Geodimeter System Tools (GST), GDMDIR. Use IMPORT to import Geodimeter survey files.
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| GM1 | Limit the slope of triangles.Raise the lowest point in affected triangles in a DTM surface by 1 mm until no triangle has a slope greater than the nominated value.
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| GOLDER | Import data from a Golder Associates format
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| GOLFAREA | Report areas of golf course fairways, greens, bunkers and tees.Report, sum and label the area of each selected closed set or pline representing a fairway, green, bunker or tee. The areas of all greens, bunkers and tees with centroids inside a fairway are subtracted from the area of that fairway. The fairways are selected by record. The greens, bunkers and tees are selected by layer.
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| GPXOUT | Export points to Topografix/Mapsource GPS eXchange Format (.GPX).Export selected points to a .GPX file optimised for reading into Garmin Mapsource software. Use Settings to choose the coordinate system from which your coordinates will be converted to latitude and longitude on WGS84. The waypoint name is derived from either the Terramodel point number or name. See also GCGPXIN and GARMINOU.
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| GRADESMT | Export files to Leica GradeSmart 3D Machine Control for graders and dozers.Export the centreline, plan, layer and triangle files required for dozers or graders fitted with Leica Geosystems GradeSmart 3D Machine Control. GRADESMT writes coordinates computed along selected strings to 0.0001m precision using specified tolerances in Carlson .CL, .PLN and .LAY file formats. A DTM can also be exported as a Leica TPStakeout TSB file.
If you have multiple alignments, repeat with a different roadjob. These files can be combined into a .PRJ project file using Leica Gradesmart software. To verify elevations at locations in the .TSB, use Leica TPStakeout software on a Leica survey instrument. See also TPSTKOUT which can export to other TPStakeout file formats.
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| GRDPTS | Interpolate an ASCII X,Y,Z file from a DTM and grid.The grid is rounded to the nearest interval (unless rows cross the DTM edge multiple times). Very large grids can be created, limited by disk space not project file size. The generic X,Y,Z file format can be read into many applications including Spreadsheets. See also GRIDEXPT which keeps to grid even when rows cross the DTM edge multiple times and can optionally not round the coordinates to the nominated interval. DTMGRID is similar, except points are created in the project.
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| GRIDELEV | Generate a grid of points, interpolate elevations from a DTM and generate a report.
For all reports, the heading is derived from layer name of the grid points. The report lists only the number of points specified when creating the grid earlier. If you have manually inserted or removed points then this report will be wrong.
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| GRIDEXPT | Interpolate an ASCII X,Y,Z file from a DTM and grid.Round the coordinates to the nominated interval or increment from the lower left corner of the box. Very large grids can be created, limited by disk space and not project size. The generic X,Y,Z file format can be read into many applications including spreadsheets. DTMGRID is similar, except points are created in the project. See also GRDPTS.
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| GRIDMAKE | Create a grid of points or plines using grid settings.Create a grid of points or plines then label them like this:
See also DTMGRID and GCGENGRD.
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| GRIDSET | Configure current grid settings.Configure the colour, type, spacing and visibility of a display grid for each view mode. The Grid on tick box, makes the grid visible unless the interval is to close to display or no grid line passes though the display. Set the Horizontal and Vertical distance between grid intervals, in ground units, for the horizontal and vertical directions. For the Plan, Sheet, and Xsect view modes, the vertical control is dimmed and the vertical spacing is set equal to the horizontal spacing. Set the grid type to Dots, Ticks or Lines. When the Ticks option is selected, you can enter the horizontal and vertical length of the tick marks in sheet units. To create a grid of points or plines, use GRIDMAKE or GCGENGRD. To snap to the grid, use SNAPSET to set a similar snap interval to the grid interval.
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| GRIDVOL | Compute the cut and fill volumes of selected grid cells.The volumes are reported and text showing the values is created in each cell. The selected cells can be closed plines of any shape.
Place the generated cells and subcells on different layers, so they can be selected or displayed easily. If you label the cells with text, use vertical justification in the styles to prevent overwriting. Because cells can be any shape, the cells could be stockpile boundaries, for example. See also GCGRDVOL which also controls reports, text layers and style.
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| GRP2NAME | Change the name of each object to match its group.This can be helpful where you want to use groups with a function that uses names. For example, where you want to export to a format that includes a name or description field. You may then want to use DESC to change numeric names to alphanumeric. See also REGROUP which changes the group to match the layer and LAY2NAME which changes the name of each object to match its layer.
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| GSIDTMOU | Export a layer in Leica DTM Stakeout GSI format.The DTM can be uploaded into Leica Total Stations that include DTM stakeout software, such as TC1100. Choose between 8-character and 16-character GSI format. Coordinate shift values are set where the coordinates are 1000000 or above. DTM Layer Name, JobID and export file name. Export all triangles in the DTM or only DTM triangles entirely inside a pline boundary. Depending on the the software installed on the Leica total station, you may be able to also export triangles by TPSTKOUT or EXPORT LandXML or DXF 3DFaces. See also GCGSIOUT and EXPORT LandXML for alignments and GCPTSOUT for points.
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| GSSWP | Geocomp Systems Support web page.Type GSSWP at the command line to launch your default web browser and start a new window for the Geocomp Systems Support web page http://www.geocomp.com.au/support/.
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| GST | Geodimeter Software Tools.Geodimeter Software Tools (or GST) is a stand-alone application for communication with Geodimeter survey instruments. While Geodimeter Software Tools 2.02 is included on some Terramodel installation CDs including 9.8, but is largely replaced in later releases of Terramodel by other functions including GFE, RDE, IMPORT, EXPORT, Remote Device Manager and Trimble Data Transfer. GST is not installed automatically. After installing, (by default to C:\Trimble\GST\Geotool.exe), run GST and check that the Settings are correct for your conventions. Note especially that the default angle units are Grads so you may want to change them to DMS. GST can be executed from a Terramodel command prompt using an ALIAS. GST is not secured to a key. If the related application GEOMODEL is installed and run and no key is found, GEOTOOL, which is similar to GST, will run instead. If GEOMODEL finds any Terramodel key, neither GEOTOOL nor GEOMODEL will run (unless the key has Geotool module) so use GST or IMPORT and EXPORT for communication and CONTOUR for contouring.
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| HALDATA | Create a horizontal alignment by entering curves into a table.Create or edit a horizontal alignment through entry of intersection point coordinates and curve data into a table. The curve types are
See also CURVE.
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| HALMANAGER | Manage registered horizontal alignments.Register horizontal alignments, chainage equations and horizontal offsets. Horizontal alignments are used to designate the path that the design will follow, and to control the way in which features are transitioned.
See also GCACTIVE and VALMANAGER.
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| HALVALRP | Report horizontal and vertical alignments.At xlines along selected HAL, design VAL and Existing VAL, report chainage, easting, northing, design elevation, existing elevation, elevation difference and grade. You can consider skips from the current road job.
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| HATCH | Hatch regions enclosed by boundaries.Create a single block from hatching plines within selected boundary lines. Select Pattern to hatch with a predefined hatch pattern using HATCHPAT. Select User to hatch at a user-defined angle and spacing using HATCHUSER.
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| HATCHENC | Hatch the region enclosed by selected objects.Create a single block by hatching within a single region defined by multiple boundary lines. Select a predefined hatch pattern, a scale and a location inside the boundary lines. The block boundary is defined by tracing inside selected boundaries. The hatch patterns can be selected from a list controlled by HATCHPAT. The hatch scale is stored as a project variable. HATCHENC has been replaced by GCTRACE which can also create plines or sets, control the maximum snap distance and report Basic and Alt areas.
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
HATCHPAT
![]() |
Hatch a region within a closed boundary with a pre-defined hatch pattern.Create a single internal block by hatching within a closed boundary using a predefined hatch pattern and scale in sheet units. The selection of hatch patterns is defined in the first TMODEL.PAT found in the Terramodel Search Path, which may be a custom folder, or ..\Terramodel\Geocomp, or failing that C:\Program files (x86)\Trimble\Shared\Locale\English\ or C:\Program files\Trimble\Shared\Locale\English\. copy and paste the patterns into TMODEL.PAT. The default pattern is the first in TMODEL.PAT. The default scale is derived from the plan view scale and the sheet units. The Hatch toolbox is included in the Geocomp.ws workspace. You can define your own hatch patterns in TMODEL.PAT, or copy from some other source, as long as they are in the AutoCAD hatch pattern format. The selection dialog includes a button to load hatch patterns from any PAT file, for that Terramodel session only. The hatch blocks are stored in project, but the patterns are not not, so to create new hatch blocks of the same pattern in a new Terramodel session, you need to reload the pattern, unless they are in the default hatch pattern definition file TMODEL.PAT.
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| HATCHUSER | Hatch regions enclosed by boundaries with a user-defined hatch pattern.Create a single block from hatching plines within selected boundary lines using a hatch angle, space and scale. The spacing and scale are in sheet units.
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
HDMS
|
Hydrographic Data Management System.A suite of tools for processing hydrographic data. HDMS can be tailored to suit your hydrographic software and instrumentation. Available in customised versions for several hydrographic systems including Geocomp Systems' GeoNav, Trimble HYDROpro and Reson. Depth labels can be applied, formatted and weeded. Depths, points and contours can be coloured by depth ranges. See also:
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| HDMSDCLBLK | Create hatching coloured by depth.See HDMS.
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| HECIN | Import a HEC-RAS Geometry file.
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| HECOUT | Export a HEC-RAS Geometry file.
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| HECOUTGC | Export a HEC-RAS Geometry file.Improved version of HECOUT.
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
HELP
![]() |
Terramodel Help.Open the Welcome page of Terramodel where you can select the main Terramodel Help, Import-Export Help or Raw Data Editor Help. Terramodel Help details the features of Terramodel commands that are included in the standard Terramodel release. Press F1 while using standard commands to open the relevant help page. ALIASes including ?, content, contents, helpexport, helpgfe, helptoolbox, helpimport, helprde, helptv, hlp and man may open particular help pages. If you get the Windows message "Why can't I get Help from this program?", please go to Installing Terramodel 10.61H where we explain how to download and install WinHelp32. See also ABOUT, GCHELP, MSFIXIT and DOCUMENTS.
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| HIDE | Toggle the visibility of set segments.REVEAL makes all segments visible for selected sets. Hidden segments can be labeled with LABELSEG. DISPLAYSET Ignore Hide setting displays all segments, even hidden ones. There are times when it is desirable to have a breakline or closed set but hide a segment for plotting purposes. You can also avoid plotting a whole set by using a colour mapped to pen 0 by PLOTSET or giving it an pen-up linetype.
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| ID | Report properties of the selected object.Report or edit properties such as object type, point numbers, north and east coordinates, elevation, name, record number, reference record number, CAD properties, layer name, colour number and linetype. See EDIT for more details of the properties. See also GC34 to find a point.
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| IDANGLE | Report angle within two lines or three points.If three point, nominate a pivot point, an ahead bearing and a deflection bearing.
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| IDSTATION | Display the chainage and offset.Display the chainage and offset at the cursor from a selected set or pline. Select an alignment set or pline. The ACTIVE alignment is the default, unless no active alignment has been set. For Point, select a location. A rubber band rubberband is drawn from the cursor to the lowest chainage perpendicular to the alignment. Chainage and offset are shown in the coordinate scroll. The rubber band and coordinate scroll are updated as the cursor moves. A negative offset is to the left of the alignment (looking in the direction of increasing stations. IDSTATION is also known as IDCHAINAGE. See also GCIDCHN, CENVIEW and GC03
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| IGRP | Display only objects in the same group.Turn all objects in the same group as the selected object on, and all other objects off. See also QISOLATE, LAYERSET, OFF, OFFALL, ON, ONALL, ONGRP and SETGRP.
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| ILINE | Create points at intersections of selected lines.Choose the layer for the new points and the order of point creation. In the version supplied by Geocomp Systems, sets as well as plines are supported, and elevations are interpolated. If the elevation cannot be interpolated from the line with the lowest record number, ILINE interpolates from the other record, where possible.
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| IMAGE | Image manager.Position, display, plot, and modify BMP, DCX, DIB, GIF, JPEG, PCX, PICT, TIFF, TGA, WMF, and WPG raster images in your project. The image list shows the image classification; view; name, draw state; and approximate ground coverage (size) in project units for the view. Images are initially ordered by date. Newer images are at the top of the image list. Use the Image Up/Image Down buttons to move an image within the stack. All images are reloaded each time an image is added or revised. If you open a project file that is linked to missing images, you are prompted to browse for the image files. Select Yes, to browse for an image, No to postpone browsing for that image or Cancel to postpone browsing for any image.
REDRAW to redisplay the images, ADDIMAGE to add an image to multiple plotboxes and IMAGEPTH to change the image paths to a new location. Refer to Terramodel help for more information.
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| IMAGEPTH | Change file locations for IMAGE manager.Change the path of all images in a project to the single location of a selected image. Use IMAGEPTH when you are supplied a project file and images by someone who places images in a different location. Restart Terramodel to see the new images. The visibility and location of each image is retained.
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| IMANAGER | Island manager.Create, copy and delete traffic island templates and assign templates to road jobs. The Island Manager has similar features to the finish and subgrade template managers. The chainage list box shows all of the currently defined templates for the specified roadway, including the station at which the template starts, its name, and the number of shapes it contains on the each side.
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| IMPORT | Import data using scripts.Using a system of programmable scripts, import from to a wide range of file formats. The formats include various data collectors and survey instruments, ASCII, AutoCAD dwg, dxf, TDS, Microstation .dgn, Terramodel .pro and LandXML. You can also download the file from some survey instruments using the Remote Device Manager. IMPORTSMGR controls and edits the scripts, including which scripts are listed on the menu. See also EXPORT and DFEDIT. Terramodel can take a long time to IMPORT a DXF or DWG file if it has to remove duplicate points as it goes. If there is a layer called DXF_NO_PT_CHK at the time of import, the duplicate points are not removed. Then use DTM formation or GC31 to remove duplicate points afterwards.
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| IMPORTGC | Required for IMPORTXS.TML to
import Geocomp .CES format files.
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| IMPORTSMGR | Import script manager.Open the Import script manager where you can create, edit, and delete import scripts. You can also run an import script from the script manager by selecting the script and clicking the Run button. For Help, Press F1 while creating a script. The scripts are stored as files of the same name in the ...\Shared\ImportExport\ folder. If the script file name is ticked, the script is visible on the IMPORT menu and the file extension is .xe. If not ticked, it is not visible, and .xe_.
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| IMPORTXS | Import cross sections into a Roadway.Supports a range of formats. Each format has its own additional TML. Supported formats include: Geocomp CES, Terramodel Roads V8, Texas RDS, Geopak, Agtek, NCDOT and Softdesk. To import a file of chainage, offset, elevation without a Roadway, see GC65FILE instead. Import Cross Sections.
Notes about importing Geocomp Cross Section Files
Create a Roadway from points.
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| INCRTEXT | Create text from incrementing numbers.Create text records at selected locations with values starting at a specified integer and incrementing by one. Great for house and lot numbers. You can set a prefix, suffix, text style and direction. See also GCINCTXT which allows for other increments and real numbers.
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| INSALT | Import GeoNav Salt Harvester log files.
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| INT3DSET | Create sets with elevations interpolated or extrapolated from specified points.This is useful for estimating surfaces for volume calculations. Draw a set like a pline, specifying elevations for only those points where the elevation is known, leave the rest of the points with elevations = *. Elevations where unknown are automatically interpolated or extrapolated from the 3D points. The points with known elevations are given the name "tm_3d", and the others are named "tm_2d". Use INTERP3D to recompute the elevations on "tm_2d" points if any of the "tm_3d" points are later changed. See also GC50.
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| INTERP3D | Modify elevations of points with name "tm_2d".Elevations are interpolated from elevations of points in the same set with name "tm_3d". Use INTERP3D to recompute elevations interpolated by INT3DSET after any points in the set have been changed. See also GC50 which does not require named points, but therefore cannot be updated automatically.
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| INTOSET | Insert points into a set.Insert the selected points into a set if the points are within a specified distance of the set. The entered tolerance is stored as a project variable. The initial value is derived from the SetArcTol value in TMODWIN.INI.
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| IR_BAY | Design irrigation bays.Survey, design, estimate and plot of flood irrigation projects in a single application. Given the bay layout and existing surface, adjust the slopes and levels of each bay to optimise and balance the earthworks. Includes several related files.
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| ISLAND | Traffic island editor.The Island Editor has similar menus and features to the finish and subgrade template editors. The most significant difference in the Island Editor is the way the user designs an island — from the outside in. Island Editor use of multiHal transitions to tie the outside edge of the template (usually a kerb) to a pre-defined line or group of lines. Then the template is built from preexisting shapes towards the centre of the island. To Create an Island
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| JOB2AGA | Convert a Geodimeter job file to a Geodimeter raw data file.Convert a Geodimeter job file created by a Geodimeter or Trimble instrument into a Geodimeter Raw data file with .AGA file extension suitable for use with GCIMPORT. Geodimeter Raw files are slightly different to Geodimeter .JOB files. This function does not convert Trimble DC .JOB or Journal .JOB files.
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| JOBOUT | Create a Geodimeter job file from points.Select a station and a number of points, then create a Geodimeter .job file of pseudo-observations computed from the points such that if the job file is reduced they would match the original coordinates. For applications that compute from observed Geodimeter data, rather than coordinates. For example, so you can correct for a vertical collimation error in a Geocomp FLD file using GCIMPORT.
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| JOIN | Join sets with common points.If there are gaps, use CONNECT instead. See also DISJOIN to break sets and plines into segments.
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| KEAYSIN | Import data from Keays transfer (TR?) files.
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| KEAYSOUT | Export data to Keays transfer (TR1) files.
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| KORKDTM | Export DTM layer to Kork format.
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| LABELANG
| Label the angle-right at each point of the selected set.Label the angle-right at each point of the selected set using the current text style.
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| LABELARC
| Label segment with radius as text along.
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| LABELCONTOURS
| Label contour plines with text.Place contour labels on plines manually. For adding a few extra labels to those generated by CONTOUR or for when you have contour plines but no DTM.
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| LABELGRID
| Label grid within a box.See also GCLABGRD which has more options including making the grid and GRIDMAKE.
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| LABELHAL
| Label horizontal alignment intersection points.Label a single location on a HAL, or a whole HAL. See also GC27, GCLABIP, LABELPI and LABELVAL.
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| LABELINE
| Label horizontal alignments with names in plotboxes.Label selected HALs inside each selected pline box on the selected layer. Text objects in the selected text style showing the name of the alignment are placed along the alignment close to the centre of each selected plotbox.
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| LABELLOT
| Change lot area labels to show alternative area.Change lot area labels created by LABELSETS to show the Alternative Area set in UNITSSET Labeling and Conversion Factors. The Alt areas are typically Acres or Hectares. For each selected set, if the area of the set is greater than the entered value, and the "Acreage" text height is 0.000, change the "Acreage" text height to the same value as "Sq. Units" (if non-zero), and change the "Sq. Units" value to 0.000. The text height is in sheet units and may vary from lot to lot.
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| LABELPI | Label intersection pointsLabel intersection points with no curve on selected HAL, with IP Chainage, Delta angle, Easting and Northing. Chainages are labelled with "Sta". The text is placed legibly and perpendicular to the HAL at an offset which you can enter or select graphically. See also LABELPI, LABELHAL and GC27.
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| LABELPOINT | Label points with point labels and symbols.Label selected points with symbols and labels derived from point label blocks. Label Points Options
See also F7, F9, F11, , GC93 and PTLAB.
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| LABELROADHAL | Label a registered horizontal alignment with intersection pointsLabel a registered horizontal alignment using the LABELHAL settings.
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| LABELROADVAL | Label a registered vertical alignment with intersection pointsLabel a registered vertical alignment using the LABELVAL settings.
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| LABELSEG | Label set segments with dimensions.Create EAT text objects labelling the bearings and/or distances of selected straight set segments, and the curve properties of curved set segments. The resulting labels dynamically update to display the revised segment geometry as the points that define the labeled set segments move. Labels that are created such that they are aligned with and placed along the line segment move with that segment as it moves. The labels are created in accordance with the current straight line and arc segment label styles which control the content and placement of the geometric properties associated with a line and curve segment respectively. Label Segments Options
Tips on using Label Segments
See also GCDIMLOT which dimensions using EAT text that is easier to edit and LABELSETS which labels sets with lot numbers and areas.
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| LABELSETS | Label sets with lot number and area.
See also LABELLOT which changes lot labels to show the alternative areas, GCLABLOT which creates EAT text objects instead of labels and LABELSEG which labels set segments with dimensions.
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| LABELSTA | Label a chainage using text with a leader line.Label a chainage with text leader lines at a chainage and offset from a horizontal alignment.
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| LABELTABLE | Create a table of attribute text for selected lines and curves.Create, edit, move, name or control visibility of tables. Table objects are only created by LABELTABLE and so are distinct from plines, text and blocks. Label tables are used to tabulate dimensions of short lines in subdivisions.
UNITSSET precision controls the decimal places of bearings and distances in the table. Variable precision is not applied. To round bearings or distances in tables according to distance, first EXPLODE the label table into text and plines, then use TEXTRND to round the resulting text to a predefined cadastral standard. Some functions, such as CRDTABLE, create "tables" of plines and text, but these are not table objects.
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| LABELVAL
| Label vertical alignment intersection points.Label a single location on a VAL, or a whole VAL. See also GC27, GCLABIP, LABELPI and LABELHAL.
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| LABGRADE | Label grade between two points.
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| LABPT | Label selected points with EAT text showing point number, easting, northing, elevation, name or symbol.Create "smart text" (EAT) objects labelling selected points. Point labels can be defined by graphical example, based on an existing point label or a temporarily placed template, or by editing a dialog box. The settings can then be saved to or loaded from a file. LABPT settings files have an .LPS filename extension.See also LABPTQ.
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| LABPTQ | Label selected points with EAT text showing point number, elevation or name.Select any combination of the three. Set layer, text style and colour. See also LABPT.
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| LANDFILL | Create a herringbone floor.For use in landfill drainage systems. One requirement for a landfill is that the drainage must "feel" a net percentage (2%) slope across the trough system. The user begins with a known low point and the desired longitudinal and transverse slopes. A series of troughs is created and the data points connected with sets in order to ensure the correct DTM formation.
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| LAY2NAME | Change the name of each object to match its layer.This can be helpful where the data has been classified by layer, but you need to plot or export using names. Names of text objects and blocks are not changed. See also DESC which changes numeric names to alphanumeric, REGROUP which changes the group to match the layer and GRP2NAME which changes name of each object to match its group.
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| LAYER | Select current layer from a list.The list can also be selected from the toolbar button next to the current layer. See also SETCURL for picking a layer by an object and LAYERSET for other layer settings.
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| LAYERMAP | Rename layers based on .map file.The map file format is simply: old_layer,new_layer Use # to start any comment lines. The maximum length of a Terramodel layer name is 16. Layers are simply renamed; objects are not relayered. If layer names are duplicated in the mapping file, or already exist in the project, layer names will be duplicated (which should be avoided).
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| LAYERNXT | Change the current layer to the next layer in alphabetical order.Change the current layer to the next layer in alphabetical order, which is the same sort order as LAYERSET.
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
LAYERSET
![]() |
Create, edit and delete layers.Layers have become an accepted standard for CAD systems and are used for grouping common objects together so that they can be manipulated as a whole. When an object is created, it derives its colour and linetype from the current settings of the layer on which it is placed. This creates a simple and logical means of assigning these CAD properties to objects as they are created. These settings are stored with the project file. In addition to the common CAD uses of layers, Terramodel also views each layer as a separate DTM. You can separate logical portions of the design onto different layers and control each terrain model on a layer-by-layer basis. The Layer Settings dialog box is used to control several other layer properties. When a single layer is selected, it is highlighted in the layer list box and its name is displayed in the Name edit control. To select a single layer, simply click the desired name in the layer list box. To select multiple layers, press and hold CTRL while clicking your layer selections. To select all of the layers in the layer list box use the Select All command button. Limit which layers will be listed in the layer list box by using the mask setup options described later. Changes in the colour and linetype settings for layers do not change the properties of any existing objects—only objects that are created subsequently. Objects that are set to display the colour by layer will display the current layer colours.
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| LAYINFO | List summary information by layer for selected points.List by layer, for the selected points, the Layer name, View names, number of records, number of points, number of 3D Points, number of 3D points not in DTM and the maximum and minimum Easting, Northing and Elevation. The totals are summed and the ranges also computed for all the selected points. See also DTMINFO, OLIST and LIST.
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
LAYLSET
![]() |
Make layers in the selected layerlist visible, and other layers invisible.
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| LAYOUT | Create parallel sets for subdivisions.Creates parallel offset lines, intersections and cul-de-sacs from a centreline alignment. Layout rights of way, footpaths, kerbs, gutters and intersections for an entire subdivision with a few steps.
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| LAYUSTN | Relayer and colour selected objects based on first four characters in name.This is primarily used to convert a ROADDTM layer to separate layers for conversion to Microstation. The name attribute of each RoadDtm object is derived from the point codes in the Road Template Shapes. If the first four characters in the name match the first four characters in the MAP file, then the object will be relayered to the layer nominated in the map file. If the layer in the map file does not exist, it will be created with the nominated colours. Each line in the map file is in the format: Name,Layer,Colour
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| LC | Locate coordinate.Report the coordinate of the selected location.
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| LEVEL3W | Add or edit three-wire level (stadia) information.
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| LEVELLST | Report the level (stadia) points.
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| LEVELS | Add or edit single wire level (stadia) information.
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| LIDARGRD | Import Light Detection and Ranging (LIDAR) data in a grid.Import X, Y, Z and Intensity from common ASCII LIDAR file formats in a grid. The intensity value is assigned to the colour number and name. With some colourmaps, this displays different features such as trees more clearly. You can limit the import to only points within a closed boundary pline or an offset from a pline alignment. If you specify a Grid Interval, only points within the specified Max Distance of locations on the grid will be imported. For example, if the data is at roughly 1m spacing and you only want 10m spacing, specify a Grid Interval 10 and Max Distance less than 1. To ignore grids, use LIDARIN. To import ESRI gridded LIDAR files, use GCESRIIN. You can further reduce the number of points using 3DFILTER.
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| LIDARIN | Import Light Detection and Ranging (LIDAR) data.Import X, Y, Z and Intensity from common ASCII LIDAR file formats. The intensity value is assigned to the colour number and name. With some colourmaps, this displays different features such as trees more clearly. You can import only the points within a closed boundary pline or an offset from a pline alignment. To import only points on a grid, use LIDARGRD. To import ESRI gridded LIDAR files, use GCESRIIN. You can further reduce the number of points using 3DFILTER.
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| LINEINT | Evenly space points where coordinates are wrong.Recompute X and Y of points on a set by linear interpolation and even spacing, between two points. The elevations are unchanged. Use this to estimate the position of coordinates where the X and Y positions are incorrect but the sequence and elevations are correct, for example when a GPS and echo sounder passes under a bridge.
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| LINETYPE | Modify the linetype of selected plines and sets.Use LINETYPESET to load linetypes from a .LIN file. If Quick Linetype is enabled in DISPLAYSET the linetype is displayed as SOLID. To modify the linetype so it displays By Layer, use LINEZERO.
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| LINETYPESET | Load or purge selected linetypes.Use Load to list of the linetypes within the currently specified file .LIN file (it defaults to tmodwin.lin) or browse to select and load linetypes from a different linetype file. Any linetype previously loaded into the project is replaced by the new definition. The maximum number of linetypes that can be loaded is 255. Use Purge to list linetypes within the project file that are not in use. If a linetype is in use it can not be purged. Select one or more of the listed linetypes and purge as desired. Removing a linetype definition saves a small amount of memory but more importantly reduces the choices in the list of linetypes to make selection easier. See Terramodel User Guide Chapter 5 for the linetype format description. The Terramodel .LIN file is in a different format to the AutoCAD .LIN format.
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| LinetypeToggle | Toggle on or off the linetype selector on the toolbar.LinetypeToggle is an ALIAS to MACROPLAY LINETYPETOGGLE which simulates the Linetype toolbar toggle in the Window menu.
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| LINETYPS | Draw samples of all the currently loaded linetypes.Create samples of currently loaded linetyes on the current layer in the sheet view.
This gives a visual indication of what is available in the current project.
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| LINEZERO | Modify linetype to By layer.Modify the linetype of selected plines or sets to By Layer. Plines or sets with a linetype of By Layer are displayed according to the linetype configured in LAYERSET for the layer they are on. See also COLOUR to Colour By Layer and LINETYPE to select other linetypes.
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| LINKSET | Configure DTM links.Control the way all DTM points are linked by commands that form DTMs.
Once you have established the correct maximum edge distance and angle for a particular DTM layer, create a DTMEDGE to retain those settings, before changing the link settings to suit a different DTM layer in the same project.
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| LinkToggle | Toggle on or off the DTM link display.LinkToggle is an ALIAS to MACROPLAY LINKTOGGLE which toggles the DTM links using LINKSET then REDRAW.
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| LIST | List information about selected types of objects.List information to the P3pad report editor, where it can be formatted, manipulated and saved to a file or sent to your printer. Choose one of these reports:
Each report be started by selecting the LIST button, or directly from the command line by entering the command, or LIST then the first letters of the option. For example, to list the plines, enter LPLINES, LIST PL or LIST then select the Plines button.
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| LISTFONT | List and create a table of loaded fontsList the loaded fonts in the message scroll and create table of sample text in the sheet view on layer LIST_FONTS. This the list of fonts used by text objects, text objects in blocks, text style settings and other Terramodel settings. LISTFONT does not list other available fonts. See TEXTMETRICS and FONTCHNG to load other fonts. As text is imported from a DWG, DXF or DGN file, if the text font is mapped by the selected AutoCAD Conversion Mapping File (ACF) or Microstation Conversion Mapping file (MCF) to a Terramodel font, the text font will be substituted. If the FNT file for a loaded font is missing and not substituted, message scroll displays a warning once, and any text in that font is displayed in the default font, usually TMODELF. To get rid of missing-font warning messages, you could:
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| LISTGRP | List all groups used by selected objects to the message scroll.Groups are first sorted into numerical order. Group 0 is not listed.
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| LISTLOTS | List geometry of lotsFor each selected set, list the name, point numbers and the bearing, distance, (and arc and radius if relevant), of each segment. If the set is closed, the area is shown.
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| LISTPIPE | List as-constructed pipe data.Compare natural surface points, with a design pipe and alignment. Specify the Design HAL, top of pipe set, natural surface points and pipe diameter. The report shows Chainage, Offset, Easting, Northing, RL (Top), Pipe cover, Trench depth, Segment grade and Deflection angle.
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| LISTREF | List reference files for a project.List reference files for a project in the message scroll area. You can copy and paste text from the message scroll.
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| LISTTEXT | List text objects.List selected text to a P3Pad report in easting order. EAT codes are not converted. See also TXTOUT.
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| LLAYER | Print a report of all the layersReport all the layers in the project, the layer colours and linetype and the number of objects on each layer. The same as LIST... Layers. See also LLRPT which lists the layer lists and can be used to transfer layers from one project to another.
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| LLGRID | Draw Latitude and Longitude grids and labels.See GCLLGRID which is based on LLGRID but has an improved dialog. See also LLTABLE.
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| LLIST | Assign a layer list to multiple dynaviewsModify the layer list property of selected dynaviews.
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
LLISTSET
![]() |
Create and edit layer lists.Add or delete layers from a layer list and designate which of those layers are to be shown with background prominence. If a layer list is associated with a dynaview, only objects on layers on the layer list are displayed within the dynaview, even if the visibility of the layer is turned off. layer list names can have up to 16 characters. For each layer list name, all layers are shown, but only the listed layers are highlighted in the central "Layers" window and shown in the background prominence window. Listed layers can be highlighted in the "Background prominence" window. If "Use shift" is enabled in the Advanced settings of PLOTSET, the value of the colour shift is added to the colour number of objects on layers with background prominence in the dynaview. Similarly, the pen shift is added when plotting. For example, if pens 65 to 128 are similar to pens 1 to 64 but with lighter colours (or thinner lines), for a dynaview showing design features to plot existing contours in the lighter colours, give the contour layer background prominence in the layer list used by that dynaview, and use a pen shift of 64. The Capture command button selects the layers for the currently selected layer list by capturing the current layer visibility settings in LAYERSET. Use the Save button to save the layer list configuration. See also LLIST, DYNAVIEW, EDIT, GC32, LAYLSET and MOSSOUT.
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| LLOTS | Creates a table showing the block, lot, area and % area for each set selected.The same as LIST... Lots. See also LISTLOTS.
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| LLRPT | Layer list reportReport each layer within each layer list to P3Pad. The file LLRPT.CSV is also silently created in the project file location with layer_list,layer_name,line_colour,point_colour,linetype. To include all layers, first use LAYERSET to make all layers visible, then LLISTSET to Capture the visible layers to a new layer list. Layers with no objects are included. Because CREATELL can read LLRPT.CSV, you can transfer layers and layer lists from one project to another. LLAYER reports the colours, linetype and number of objects for each layer.
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| LLTABLE | Create a coordinate table of points including latitudes and longitudes.Create a table of coordinates from selected points with columns for Point number, Easting, Northing, Elevation, Description, Latitude and Longitude.
See also CRDTABLE and GCLLGRID.
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| LLTYPE | Change the linetype of the current layer.Open the linetype dialog so you can change the linetype of new sets and plines in the current layer. This is the same as clicking on the linetype picker on the toolbar, or changing the linetype of the current layer using LAYERSET. You can also change the linetype using an argument.
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| LOADATT | Load or reload the specified attribute definition file.
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| LOBJS | List details of selected objects.Includes the layer, type, number of elements (for plines and sets), colour, point number, font name and linetype. The same as LIST... Objs.
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| LOTJOIN | Create closed sets from sets enclosing selected text.Create closed sets by tracing inside selected sets around locations at the insertion points of selected text objects. Typically, the selected sets represent subdivision lots and the selected text represent lot numbers. The new closed sets are created on the current layer with names derived from the corresponding text objects. Similar to TRACEBDY and GCTRACE which only do one lot a time.
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| LOTPTRLS | Label lot corners with existing and finished elevations.Label selected points with text with values interpolated from nominated existing and finished dtm layers and settings for layer, style, prefix and offsets.
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| LPLINES | List details of selected plines.Includes the name, starting chainage, elevation, coordinates along the pline, and the radius associated with any vertex that has been curved, of selected plines. The same as LIST... Plines.
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| LPOINTS | List the coordinates of the selected points.List selected points with options to include Point Number, Record Number, Easting, Northing, Elevation, Name, Layer, Colour, View, Symbol Number and General Information. In the Geocomp Update, LPOINTS is aliased to GCLPTS which includes options for Group and Export to CSV. To list Layers, Objects, Unused Points, Sets, Plines or Lots, see LIST. To list radiations, see LPTSRAD. To list with heights as depths, see PORTSC1.
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| LPTCOLOR | Change the points colour of the current layer.Open the points colour dialog so you can change the colour number of new points in the current layer. This is the same as clicking on the right-hand colour picker on the toolbar, or changing the points colour of the current layer using LAYERSET. You can also change the colour using an argument.
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| LPTSRAD | List the coordinates and radiations of the selected points.Similar to LPOINTS except it includes radiations from a stand point. If you chose to change the point name to include the bearing and distance, you can use CRDTABLE to tabulate them.
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| LSEC1 | Label long sections in Geocomp-style.Label selected profiles with a table beneath showing chainages, elevations and grades. Select profiles in the profile view. Select plotboxes for sections which extend over multiple sheets. Vertical alignment details can be labelled on selected profiles. Labels are referenced to the active alignment. Click on label see the profile label settings dialog box where you can configure the layout, datum elevation, decimal places, text fonts and so on. For each listed profile you can chose whether to label (Y/N) with design grades. Profiles with vertical curves will be marked Y by default. You can chose to include superelevations, cut/fill differences, horizontal curve data and empty boxes. You can also specify a layer list to show the extent, names and colours of user-defined closed plines and sets marking regions, such as tenure, trench material, pipe type and municipality, along the active alignment, stacked in reverse alphabetical layer name order. A report lists the elevations of each profile by chainage to P3pad. See also LVC, LSEC_UK and LABELVAL.
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| LSEC_UK | Labels long sections in United Kingdom-style.Refer to the extensive Terramodel help. See also LSEC1, LVC and LABELVAL.
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| LSETS | List set detailsIncludes the name, the number of points in the set, and the point numbers that form the selected sets. The same as LIST... Sets.
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| LUNUSED | List the unused point numbers within the specified point number range.The same as LIST... Upts.
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| LVC | Label points along a vertical curve.See also LSEC1, LSEC_UK and LABELVAL.
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| LYRPROP | Edit layer properties.Configure isolate, set/pline colour, point colour, linestyle, LListDTM. See also LAYERSET.
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| MacroPlay | Play a keystroke macro.Execute the instructions contained within a saved keystroke macro file. You can pick macros from a drop down list of all .MAC files in the Macro folder specified by SYSTEM, such as C:\Program Files (x86)\Trimble\Terramodel\Macros. Specify a pause interval in milliseconds. Click Run to execute the selected macro with the specified pause interval between each step. A macro can be run from a toolbar. For example, to cascade views from the command line, type "macroplay cascade" to play our cascade.mac which is the same as picking Cascade from the Windows menu. A macro can also be used in a command ALIAS. For example, if you create an alias with Command "macroplay" and Arguments "cascade", you can play the cascade macro by typing CASCADE at the command line. This new command can now also be used in a toolbox. You can launch a macro when Terramodel starts by including macroplay in the target property of the Terramodel shortcut. Macros are created by MACRORECORD. To find Macros created by Geocomp Systems search this list for "Macro" or open DOCUMENTS then select Macros under Programming. Keystroke macros are completely different to TMLs.
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| MacroRecord | Record a keystroke macro.Record series of keystrokes as a single command to run later. When you run MACRORECORD, the message is displayed in the message scroll area: "Macro recording started. Press Ctrl + Break to stop recording." Then execute the Terramodel commands that you want to include in your macro. Press Ctrl + Break to stop recording then save the macro giving it a suitable name. Use MACROPLAY to execute the saved macro. To enable interactive selection, such as picking objects with a mouse, use the Insert key to indicate the start the End key to indicate End of the selection. While in macro-recording mode, use of the keyboard and mouse buttons is restricted to actions that can be replayed by Terramodel. You cannot select commands from menus using the mouse. You must navigate with keys such as Alt + "letter" combinations, Enter, Tab, key and cursor arrows and function keys. Macros are saved as .MAC files in the Macro folder specified by SYSTEM. This is typically C:\Program Files (x86)\Trimble\Terramodel\Macros or C:\Program Files\Trimble\Terramodel\Macros.
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| MAGNIFY | Magnify the view scale by a factor.Enter a factor for your view scale. A value greater than 1.0 expands the image, a value less than 1.0 shrinks the image. Magnify can be used with arguments. For example, we alias ZI to "Magnify 1.5" meaning Zoom In x2 and ZO to "Magnify 0.5" meaning Zoom Out 2X.
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| MAG600IN | Import Magellan Explorist 600 GPS data.Import NMEA strings from Magellan Explorist 600 GPS receivers.
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| MAGELLIN | Import Magellan GPS data.Import NMEA strings tagged as $PMGNWPL from Magellan GPS receivers.
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| MAGELOUT | Export Magellan GPS data.
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| MAPIIN | Import MapInfo .MIF files.
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| MAPIOUT | Export MapInfo .MIF files.Map information is exported as .MIF. A matching dummy .MID database file is also created, for those applications which require one, such as Trimble Pathfinder. If you need .MID files filled out, we can customise this TML to match your required fields.
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| MAPPOINTS | Create sets from point names using MAP file.String points and place symbols using an ASCII mapping file. Replaced by AUTODRAFT.
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| MASSDIAG | Scale exploded masshaul diagram.Scale and move objects in the sheet view created by exploding a MASSHAUL diagram, to a sensible coordinate system. You can place the new diagram on View 8. You should change the vertical exaggeration to suit the vertical scale in m³.
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| MASSHAUL | Create a masshaul diagram.Create a graph of earthwork volume against distance. See Terramodel Help for more details. Select Quick Explode to create a diagram in the sheet view. Use MASSDIAG to rescale and rearrange the diagram and GCHAULMN to manage the hauls.
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| MASSIMPORT | Masshaul import and export locations.Specify the chainages where material is imported or exported for a MASSHAUL diagram.
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| MATCH | Modify objects by matching properties of another object.Once you pick the object to be matched, a dialog box is presented containing check boxes representing the properties associated with that object type. Check the properties to apply to the selected objects. The selected properties of the picked object will then be assigned to the previously selected objects, where appropriate. MATCH refers to the object to be matched as the "Ref Obj". This is not related to REFERENCE objects. MATCH does not remember the previously selected properties you have to pick an object each time. If MATCH remembers CAD properties and refers to "Picked Object", MATCH has been aliased to MATCHOBJ.
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| MATCHOBJ | Modify objects by matching properties of another object.Once you pick the object to be matched, a dialog box is presented containing check boxes representing the properties associated with that object type. Check the properties to apply to the selected objects. The selected properties of the picked object will then be assigned to the previously selected objects, where appropriate. MATCHOBJ refers to the object to be matched as the "Picked object". MATCHOBJ remembers CAD settings from the previous selection. MATCH may be aliased to MATCHOBJ, even though the command name is Match on the status line.
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| MATERIAL | Material manager.List the materials for road design template, subgrade and existing surface managers. See Terramodel Help for more detail. See GCMATOUT and GCMATIN to import and export materials
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| MATRIX | Create a matrix of copies of selected objects.Create multiple copies of selected objects in rows and columns. Specify the number, spacing and bearing of the rows and columns.
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| MDLIN | Import MDL ALS *.CDU data.Import .CDU data files from Quarryman Autoscanning Laser System (ALS) by Measurement Devices Ltd (MDL).
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| MEASUNIT | Configure measurement units.Set the project's unit of measure at the beginning of a project to match the unit of measure for entering coordinates and distances. Select from feet, meters (=metres) and user defined. User defined units are added by programming a TML. To designate the unit of measure to be used in the sheet view, click the Sheet Units box, and click your choice of inch, cm, mm, dm or m. For metric projects, we recommend cm otherwise point label blocks and cross sections will not be scaled correctly.
To convert existing project data to the new unit of measure, click the Convert units check box and select either International foot or U.S. Survey foot. When you Click OK, if you clicked the Convert Units check box, a Unit Conversion Warning dialog box appears asking if you want to convert your data. Click Yes to convert the data or No if you only want to change the labels and a second Unit Conversion Warning dialog box appears. Click Yes. See also SCALE and SCALELV.
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| MENUCFG | Configure the menu.Choose a menu configuration file. Choose a menu from the .m files in the ...\Terramodel\Geocomp or ...\Locale\English folders. The menu selection is stored in TMODWIN.INI for use with all projects. If no menu is specified, when Terramodel starts it uses the menu from \Locale\English that best suits the modules on your key. The Geocomp Update adds Geocomp.m which best suits a typical installation of Terramodel with Geocomp Update. Geocomp+.m has more menus and commands. Viewer.m is is for viewing and measuring but not editing.
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| MERGE | Merge two DTMs.Create a merged DTM by copying an Inside DTM and that portion of an Outside DTM outside the extent of the Inside DTM. The Inside layer is typically a Design surface, such as one created by DESIGN. The Outside surface is typically an existing surface. It must extend beyond the Inside surface, though it does NOT have to completely encompass the Inside surface. The Merged layer should start empty. Set names are not transferred to the new layer. See also GCMERGE, GCCLIP, GC33, GC33MULT and GCCOPY.
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| MESSAGESCROLL | Toggle on or off the visibility of the message scroll display area above the command line.MessageScroll is an ALIAS to MACROPLAY MESSAGESCROLLTOGGLE which simulates the Message scroll command in the Window menu. See also CLEARMESS which clears the text from the message scroll.
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| MG1 | Label triangle with centroid.Creates a point at the centre of each triangle of a DTM surface. The elevation of the point is equal to the slope of the triangle. The point is also labelled with the % slope and a triangle symbol indicating direction of slope. Where there is a double triangle and no label, the slope is close to zero. If the text and arrow is too big, reduce the Plan View Scale ( try 20). The labels and symbols are placed on the current layer in the current line colour.
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| MHIMPORT | Import a cut/fill volume report for mass haul analysis.Nominate a roadway and phases for MASSHAUL and import a cut/fill volume report in .CSV format. See also GCHAULMN which has more options.
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| MINMAPIN | Import a MineMap file.
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| MIRROR | Copy objects to a mirror image.Copy selected objects to new locations the same distances beyond an axis defined by two points as the current distances to that axis. Labelling and some other parameters are not copied. The new objects retain the original layer names. Tables are not mirrored. Text objects are still readable. If you want backwards text, EXPLODE to plines first. See also GC93, MIRRORDY and GC56.
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| MIRRORDY | Mirror dynaviews about their Y axes.Rotated dynaviews are also shifted.
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| MKBLK | Make an internal unit block.Create a 1, 2, or 3 point unit block from selected Terramodel objects. Define an insertion point, a Y scale point (for 2 and 3 point blocks) and a Z scale point (for 3 point blocks). The selected objects are scaled into a 1 * 1 unit block. Use the measured point to point distances to scale the object. In order to have consistent results when you insert the block, you should orient a block from bottom to top (in the Y direction) and from left to right (in the X direction). EXPLODE any hatching and text into plines first.
A unit block is created so that the critical dimension of the block in the plan view is one unit in size. This means that the placed block will be the size of one unit times the scale you enter. For example, if you create a block from some objects making up a "tree canopy" one unit in diameter, and enter a scale of 3.50 when you place it, the tree block will be 3.50m across. UNITBLK and AUTODRAFT can use up to three block placement points. A one-point block is placed on the insertion point. A two-point block is placed with the insertion point (0,0) at point 1 and (0,1) at point 2. A three-point block is placed with the insertion point (0,0) at point 1, (0,1) at point 2 and (1,0) at point 3. You can simply create multiple-point blocks using BLOCK Create if your block data is arranged with those coordinates. With MKBLK you can transform the block as you create it by selecting locations to be "Ins" (0,0 or point 1), "Y" (0,1 or point 2) and "X" (1,0 or point 3). To create an external block use the Save option of the BLOCK command.
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| MKBLKINT | Convert external blocks to internal blocks.Convert selected blocks from a list of external blocks into internal blocks. You can also use the Modify function of BLOCK one block at a time. Use DELBLKS to delete missing external blocks.
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| MKV | Place a temporary marker at each point of a set or vertex of a pline.No physical markers are created; when the screen refreshes the markers have gone.
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| MOSSIN | Import Survey, Design and Models from Moss GENIO data.Convert alignments, surveys, design strings and triangles. Optionally, interpret codes using a .MIN mapping file. See also MOSSMIN which extracts features codes from a MOSS GENIO file to create an initial .MIN file.
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| MOSSMIN | Create MOSS .MIN file from MOSS GENIO features.The MOSS .MIN file is used by MOSSIN to map features in a MOSS GENIO file to desired Terramodel properties. MOSSMIN creates or adds to a .MIN file from the features in a MOSS GENIO file. Use the first 1, 2, 3 or 4 characters in the feature code. Once the .MIN file has been created, manually edit the .MIN file to enter the corresponding properties for use by MOSSIN.
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| MOSSOUT | Export Moss GENIO data.Export MOSS GENIO data using an .MSX mapping file. In the dialog, specify how to handle specific string types. In the MSX file, for each record (or layer) name filter, specify the name, the layer name or fixed characters for the 080 record in the GENIO file Also specify a DEFAULT name filter for selected objects which do not match the name or layer filter. The whole file is a single GENIO model, unless you specify multiple models using layerlists.
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| MOVE | Move objects to another location.Move selected objects by the difference between a pair of entered X,Y (or X,Y,Z if 3D is ticked) coordinates. If you only have the difference in X,Y, enter 0,0 in From. To move objects from one layer to another, use RELAYER. To move objects from one View to another, use REVIEW. To move a set, make sure you select the set and the points used to define the set. If Dragging is ON in SYSTEM, you can see the objects as you move them. If Drag Text Quick is ON in DISPLAYSET, text is displayed as text boxes only during the move.
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
MOVEPAD
![]() |
Move a pad DTM and display volumes.Create batters from a pad DTM to another DTM and calculate the resulting cut and fill quantities. Like DESIGN, the batters are projected at the slope settings of a closed series of sets around the pad DTM. As you shift the points on the pad layer using the mouse, the cut and fill quantities are recomputed and displayed in the message area. If you nominate a new elevation, the elevations of all points on the pad layer are updated so you get a horizontal pad. Therefore, if your pad includes crossfall or steps, or multiple elevations for any other reason, do not enter an elevation in MOVEPAD To automatically balance earthworks by iterating increments to the elevation of points in a pad with multiple elevations, see CUTFILL. See also SIDESLOPE.
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| MSCAPEIN | Import Mincom Minescape grid data.The layer is derived from column 4 in the data file. The name/description is from the grid row and column numbers in dat file columns 4 and 5. Columns 6, 7 and 8 are easting, northing and elevation.
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| MSFIXIT | Fix Help macros.Enable Microsoft Windows programmatic macros by executing a local copy of Microsoft Fixit 50105 If Windows programmatic macros are not enabled on Windows Vista and Windows 7, in HELP Contents you will get the error message "There was a problem running the macros. (1037)" and internal links will not work. MS Fixit 50105 modifies the Windows Registry. For more details see Microsoft Support article 917607 "I cannot open Help that was created in the Windows Help format (WinHlp32.exe)".
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| MULTCODE | Insert multiple-code separators into names before field codes.Insert multiple-code separators into names of selected points before field codes used in an AutoDraft ADC file. You can specify multiple field codes in a survey for a single point. For example, you can double-code a point as both the end of a fence and also the edge of a footpath. AUTODRAFT joins points which have names which match Field codes with Lines in a specified AutoDraft Configuration (ADC) file. AutoDraft looks for field code characters in the block of characters before the first space and after a specified multicode character. Some other Trimble applications, such as Business Center and Survey Controller, don't use multi-code characters. Instead, they identify each field code in a name by matching the first characters, and those after each space, against a different list of possible field codes. MULTCODE modifies names of points which have been field-coded to suit those applications by inserting the AUTODRAFT multi-code character before each field code. To create the list of field codes and multicode character for MULTCODE, open the ADC file in the AUTODRAFT editor, generate the Full Report and save as a text file.
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| MULTICOPY | Create multiple copies of objects.Copy selected objects to a location, as in COPY, but you can continue to copy to other locations. To copy a group of points and shift their point numbers, first assign a starting point number in POINTSET. To copy objects to another layer without changing their location, click OK without specifying the From and To locations. Tick Lay to place objects on current layer, otherwise place on original layer.
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| MultilayerDTM | Create a Digital Terrain Model from multiple layers.Enable a layer to be used as a base for a multi-layer DTM. When the base layer is specified as a DTM, the member layers are treated as a single DTM. The member layers are defined by creating a layer list with the same name as the base layer and including the desired layers as members of the layer list. The MultiLayerDTM command controls the setting for the specified layer and then opens the Layer list setting dialog box so that the appropriate layer list can be created. A layer that is a member of one multi-layer DTM cannot be a member of another multi-layer, and cannot be used as a single layer DTM. The base layer must contain at least three points with elevations. See also GCCOPY which is is easier to use.
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| MULTIPIN | Import Trimble PayDirt MultiPlane RTK Survey File.
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| MVIEW | Creates multiple dynaviews.Create dynaviews of selected plotboxes in the selected view.
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| MXVALIN | Import VAL from MX report.The MX report is not very precise so neither are the resulting coordinates.
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| NAME | Modify the name of selected objects.Terramodel sometimes refers to the name as the Description.
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| NAME2LAY | Change the layer of selected objects to match name.Specify the layer for objects with no name. The selected objects may include text and blocks. Note that the name of a text object is the text. See also LAY2NAME, PTLAYCOL, GCMAPOUT and DXFCHANG.
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| NAMESETS | Rename unnamed sets to match point names.Rename each selected set which has a blank name to match the name of the first named point in the set. Specify the number of characters to be used from the beginning of the point name. NAMESETS can be useful with MOSS GENIO conversions.
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
NEW
![]() |
Start a new Terramodel project.Open the prototype project, then save the project with a new name and location. If you change the project type to ALN or RLN, the P29 Roadline or P39 Roadline 3D editor is opened for data entry. To start a new MP2 MultiPlane project, you will need MultiPlane. See also GC02 for chainage and offset.
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| NEXTVIEW | Change the current view mode to the next open view.NEXTVIEW is an ALIAS to MACROPLAY NEXTVIEW which executes Control-F6 on the keyboard.
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| NFS | Change the name of selected objects using chainage of point from HAL.See also GC02 for chainage and offset.
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| NPSCHART | Draw a table of set or pline informationTable headings are chainage, northing, easting, radius, delta, length, tangent and deg. of curve.
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| NS95 | Nikon NS-95 Database UtilityManage data in a Nikon AP700 or AP800 database. NS95 is a DOS utility from Nikon that can work with AP700 and AP800 survey jobs. Preparing NS95Create the Data directory
Create a Terramodel Alias
The NS95 MenuType NS95 at the Terramodel command line (or run it from DOS). The initial menu options are: [J]ob Manager
[A]dd Coordinates
[I]mport Coordinates
[E]xport File Data
[S]ettings
[C]ode & Parameter Files
Within each option, the functions shown on the bottom line are selected by function keys. For example, within the Job Manager press the F1 key for Create, F2 for Copy, etc. This replicates the behaviour of the Nikon instrument software. Use the Escape key to close a menu. The Settings (for Units, etc) are saved in NS95.CFG. An NS95 job consists of a number of database files. These typically have extensions DBC, DCI, DII, DPI and DTI. These jobs are typically created on PCMCIA cards by Nikon DTM 700 and 800 series total stations. To get a survey job out of the database, either download the data from the instrument in Nikon ASCII Raw data format, or use NS95 to Export in [N]ikon v2.00 Raw File format. To import the raw data into Terramodel, use the Geocomp Nikon Raw _i import script. Alternatively, use the Nikon script which communicates using the Remote Device Manager. NS95 Command line parametersNS95 can also be operated using command line parameters from DOS or Terramodel.
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| OBJREG | Automated Plan Set Assembly and Management Program. Register Object to Sheet Command.This command is used to register objects drawn on a sheet by the user, to that sheet, or to a specific dynaview on the sheet originally created by PLANSET. Register user-created objects with the sheet, so that when the sheet is moved or deleted, these objects are moved or deleted with it. This association is done using Groups. There is one group number associated with each sheet. Objects of a general nature, not associated with a particular plan or profile dynaview, should be registered to the sheet. After selecting the objects to be registered to the sheet, click on the Sheet button to assign them to the sheet in which they lie. Since the program determines the appropriate sheet, you may include items from multiple sheets in the selection set when making a general assignment to a sheet. There are four group numbers associated with a plan or profile dynaview.
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| OBJSNAP | Enable running object snap modes.Enable point snap modes, and order of precedence. The running snap modes are always active, but can be temporarily overridden by using a specific option of the point locate control. Point snap modes allow more precision when locating and placing objects. As the various snap modes are enabled, they are included in the Order list to the right. Change the order of precedence by dragging snap modes to different positions in the Order box. The top position has the highest precedence. If Free is included, any mode after Free will never be considered. Running snap modes may cause other commands to appear as if they are not functioning, or act in an undesirable manner. If no object is found at a location that matches the enabled snaps, there is no response until Terramodel finds an object at another location. If Free is on the list, you will always get a location. Include Free if you want to be select by Windows but not if you must select an object. See also SEARCH.
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| OBSDIFF | Report vertical differences between obstructions.Report the vertical difference between two sets. If the sets cross more than once, the closest intersection to the location used to select the first set.
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| OFF | Turn off selected objects.The objects are turned of (made invisible) regardless of the SEARCH settings.
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| OFFALL | Turn off all objects in the current view.The objects are turned off (made invisible) regardless of the SEARCH settings.
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| OFFELEV | Create plines or sets at a horizontal and vertical offset.Pick the set, side, offset and elevation difference. See also GCOFFELV, GC99, OFFELEVM and SIDESLOPE.
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| OFFELEVM | Create plines or sets at a horizontal and vertical offset from multiple sets.Specify multiple sets from which to offset.
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| OFFPERP | Create set vertically offset from selected set.Specify vertical offset and new layer name.
| |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||